Methods, apparatus and systems for interference management in a full duplex radio system

ABSTRACT

Methods, apparatus and systems for enabling interference avoidance, for example from self and neighboring interference are disclosed. In one representative method implemented in a Wireless Transmit/Receive Unit (WTRU) using time-frequency (TF) resources in first and second directions, the method includes comprising TF resource muting or symbol muting, by the WTRU, one or more TF resources for communication in the first direction based on information associated with a communication in the second direction or subframe shortening, by the WTRU, by one or more TF resources for communication in the first direction based on information associated with a communication in the second direction.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application claims priority from U.S. Provisional Application No.61/917,924, filed Dec. 18, 2013, the content of which is incorporatedherein by reference.

FIELD

The present invention relates to the field of wireless communicationsand, more particularly, to methods, apparatus and systems forinterference management, for example, in a full duplex radio system.

RELATED ART

Generally, conventional two-way communication systems separate transmit(Tx) and receive (Rx) signals at each device in at least one of:frequency, tune, or space.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

A more detailed understanding may be had from the Detailed Descriptionbelow, given by way of example in conjunction with drawings appendedhereto. Figures in such drawings, like the detailed description, arcexamples. As such, the Figures and the detailed description arc not tobe considered limiting, and other equally effective examples arepossible and likely. Furthermore, like reference numerals in the Figuresindicate like elements, and wherein:

FIG. 1 is a system diagram illustrating an example communications systemin which one or more disclosed embodiments may be implemented;

FIG. 2 is a system diagram illustrating an example wirelesstransmit/receive unit (WTRU) that may be used within the communicationssystem illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 3 is a system diagram illustrating an example radio access networkand another example core network that may be used within thecommunications system illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 4 is a system diagram illustrating another example radio accessnetwork and another example core network that may be used within thecommunications system illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 5 is a system diagram illustrating a further example radio accessnetwork and a further example core network that may be used within thecommunications system illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of a downlink (DL) PhysicalResource Block (PRB) pair with normal Cyclic Prefix (CP);

FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating an example uplink (UL) PRB pair withnormal CP;

FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a representative UL PRB structure thatoverlaps with a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) region;

FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating another representative UL PRB structureshowing Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) Resource Element (RE)muting;

FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a further representative UL PRBstructure showing PUSCH symbol muting;

FIG. 10 is a diagram of an additional representative PRB structureshowing an example of a UL demodulation (DM) reference signal (DM-RS)time location change;

FIG. 11 is a diagram of still another representative UL PRB structureshowing a reduced number of UL DM-RS symbols relative to FIG. 10 ;

FIG. 12 is diagram illustrating a still further representative UL PRBstructure showing PUSCH RE muting;

FIG. 13 is diagram illustrating a still additional representative PRBstructure showing PUSCH symbol muting;

FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating yet another representative PRBstructure showing PUSCH symbol muting;

FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a yet further representative PRBstructure showing PUSCH symbol muting with fewer DM-RS symbols relativeto FIG. 16 ;

FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a yet additional representative PRBstructure showing PUSCH symbol muting with a DM-RS symbol time locationchange;

FIG. 17A is a diagram illustrating a representative PUCCH PRB pairwithout subframe shortening;

FIG. 17B is a diagram illustrating another representative PUCCH PRB pairwith subframe shortening;

FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a representative DL PRB structureshowing Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) PUSCH RE muting;

FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating another representative DL PRBstructure showing PDSCH RE muting of the last DL DM-RS symbol;

FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a further representative DL PRBstructure showing RS time shifting;

FIG. 21 is a flow chart illustrating a representative procedure fordetermining whether a subframe is a self-interference (SINTF) subframe;

FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a representative method implemented ina WTRU;

FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating another representative methodimplemented in a WTRU;

FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an additional representative methodimplemented in a WTRU;

FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a further representative methodimplemented in a WTRU; and

FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a representative method implemented ina Network Access Point (NAP) in communication with a WTRU.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

A detailed description of illustrative embodiments may now be describedwith reference to the figures. However, while the present invention maybe described in connection with representative embodiments, it is notlimited thereto and it is to be understood that other embodiments may beused or modifications and additions may be made to the describedembodiments for performing the same function of the present inventionwithout deviating therefrom.

Although the representative embodiments are generally shown hereafterusing wireless network architectures, any number of different networkarchitectures may be used including networks with wired componentsand/or wireless components, for example.

FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example communications system 100 inwhich one or more disclosed embodiments may be implemented. Thecommunications system 100 may be a multiple access system that providescontent, such as voice, data, video, messaging, broadcast, etc., tomultiple wireless users. The communications system 100 may enablemultiple wireless users to access such content through the sharing ofsystem resources, including wireless bandwidth. For example, thecommunications systems 100 may employ one or more channel accessmethods, such as code division multiple access (CDMA), time divisionmultiple access (TDMA), frequency division multiple access (FDMA),orthogonal FDMA (OFDMA), single-carrier FDMA (SC-FDMA), and the like.

As shown in FIG. 1 , the communications system 100 may include wirelesstransmit/receive units (WTRUs) 102 a, 102 b, 102 c, 102 d, a radioaccess network (RAN) 103/104/105, a core network 106/107/109, a publicswitched telephone network (PSTN) 108, the Internet 110, and othernetworks 112, though it will be appreciated that the disclosedembodiments contemplate any number of WTRUs, base stations, networks,and/or network elements. Each of the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c, 102 dmay be any type of device configured to operate and/or communicate in awireless environment. By way of example, the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c,102 d may be configured to transmit and/or receive wireless signals andmay include user equipment (UE), a mobile station, a fixed or mobilesubscriber unit, a pager, a cellular telephone, a personal digitalassistant (PDA), a smartphone, a laptop, a netbook, a personal computer,a wireless sensor, consumer electronics, and the like. The WTRU 102 a,102 b, 102 c and 102 d is interchangeably referred to as a UE.

The communications systems 100 may also include a base station 114 aand/or a base station 114 b. Each of the base stations 114 a, 114 b maybe any type of device configured to wirelessly interface with at leastone of the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c, 102 d to facilitate access to oneor more communication networks, such as the core network 106/107/109,the Internet 110, and/or the other networks 112. By way of example, thebase stations 114 a, 114 b may be a base transceiver station (BTS), aNode-B, an eNode-B (or cNB), a Home Node B, a Home eNode-B, a sitecontroller, an access point (AP), a wireless router, and the like. Whilethe base stations 114 a, 114 b are each depicted as a single element, itwill be appreciated that the base stations 114 a, 114 b may include anynumber of interconnected base stations and/or network elements.

The base station 114 a may be part of the RAN 103/104/105, which mayalso include other base stations and/or network elements (not shown),such as a base station controller (BSC), a radio network controller(RNC), relay nodes, etc. The base station 114 a and/or the base station114 b may be configured to transmit and/or receive wireless signalswithin a particular geographic region, which may be referred to as acell (not shown). The cell may further be divided into cell sectors. Forexample, the cell associated with the base station 114 a may be dividedinto three sectors. Thus, in one embodiment, the base station 114 a mayinclude three transceivers, e.g., one for each sector of the cell. Inanother embodiment, the base station 114 a may employ multiple-inputmultiple output (MIMO) technology and may utilize multiple transceiversfor each sector of the cell.

The base stations 114 a, 114 b may communicate with one or more of theWTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c, 102 d over an air interface 115/116/117,which may be any suitable wireless communication link (e.g., radiofrequency (RF), microwave, infrared (IR), ultraviolet (UV), visiblelight, etc.). The air interface 115/116/117 may be established using anysuitable radio access technology (RAT).

More specifically, as noted above, the communications system 100 may bea multiple access system and may employ one or more channel accessschemes, such as CDMA, TDMA, FDMA, OFDMA, SC-FDMA, and the like. Forexample, the base station 114 a in the RAN 103/104/105 and the WTRUs 102a, 102 b, 102 c may implement a radio technology such as UniversalMobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA),which may establish the air interface 115/116/117 using wideband CDMA(WCDMA). WCDMA may include communication protocols such as High-SpeedPacket Access (HSPA) and/or Evolved HSPA (HSPA+). HSPA may includeHigh-Speed Downlink (DL) Packet Access (HSDPA) and/or High-Speed ULPacket Access (HSUPA).

In another embodiment, the base station 114 a and the WTRUs 102 a, 102b, 102 c may implement a radio technology such as Evolved UMTSTerrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA), which may establish the air interface115/116/117 using Long Term Evolution (LTE) and/or LTE-Advanced (LTE-A).

In other embodiments, the base station 114 a and the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b,102 c may implement radio technologies such as IEEE 802.11 (i.e.,Wireless Fidelity (WiFi), IEEE 802.16 (i.e., Worldwide Tnteroperabilityfor Microwave Access (WiMAX)), CDMA2000, CDMA2000 1×, CDMA2000 EV-DO,Interim Standard 2000 (IS-2000), Interim Standard 95 (IS-95), InterimStandard 856 (IS-856), Global System for Mobile communications (GSM),Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution (EDGE), GSM EDGE (GERAN), and thelike.

The base station 114 b in FIG. 1 may be a wireless router, Home Node B,Home eNode-B, or access point, for example, and may utilize any suitableRAT for facilitating wireless connectivity in a localized area, such asa place of business, a home, a vehicle, a campus, and the like. In oneembodiment, the base station 114 b and the WTRUs 102 c, 102 d mayimplement a radio technology such as IEEE 802.11 to establish a wirelesslocal area network (WLAN). In another embodiment, the base station 114 band the WTRUs 102 c, 102 d may implement a radio technology such as IEEE802.15 to establish a wireless personal area network (WPAN). In yetanother embodiment, the base station 114 b and the WTRUs 102 c, 102 dmay utilize a cellular-based RAT (e.g., WCDMA, CDMA2000, GSM, LTE,LTE-A, etc.) to establish a picocell or femtocell. As shown in FIG. 1 ,the base station 114 b may have a direct connection to the Internet 110.Thus, the base station 114 b may not be required to access the Internet110 via the core network 106/107/109.

The RAN 103/104/105 may be in communication with the core network106/107/109, which may be any type of network configured to providevoice, data, applications, and/or voice over internet protocol (VoIP)services to one or more of the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c, 102 d. Forexample, the core network 106/107/109 may provide call control, billingservices, mobile location-based services, pre-paid calling, Internetconnectivity, video distribution, etc., and/or perform high-levelsecurity functions, such as user authentication. Although not shown inFIG. 1 , it will be appreciated that the RAN 103/104/105 and/or the corenetwork 106/107/109 may be in direct or indirect communication withother RANs that employ the same RAT as the RAN 103/104/105 or adifferent RAT. For example, in addition to being connected to the RAN103/104/105, which may be utilizing an E-UTRA radio technology, the corenetwork 106/107/109 may also be in communication with another RAN (notshown) employing a GSM, UMTS, CDMA 2000, WiMAX, or WiFi radiotechnology.

The core network 106/107/109 may also serve as a gateway for the WTRUs102 a, 102 b, 102 c, 102 d to access the PSTN 108, the Internet 110,and/or the other networks 112. The PSTN 108 may include circuit-switchedtelephone networks that provide plain old telephone service (POTS). TheInternet 110 may include a global system of interconnected computernetworks and devices that use common communication protocols, such asthe transmission control protocol (TCP), user datagram protocol (UDP)and/or the internet protocol (IP) in the TCP/IP internet protocol suite.The networks 112 may include wired and/or wireless communicationsnetworks owned and/or operated by other service providers. For example,the networks 112 may include another core network connected to one ormore RANs, which may employ the same RAT as the RAN 103/104/105 or adifferent RAT.

Some or all of the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c, 102 d in thecommunications system 100 may include multi-mode capabilities (e.g., theWTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c, 102 d may include multiple transceivers forcommunicating with different wireless networks over different wirelesslinks). For example, the WTRU 102 c shown in FIG. 1 may be configured tocommunicate with the base station 114 a, which may employ acellular-based radio technology, and with the base station 114 b, whichmay employ an IEEE 802 radio technology. Some or all of the WTRUs 102 a,102 b, 102 c, 102 d in the communication system 100 may communicate withother devices using Bluetooth technology.

FIG. 2 is a system diagram illustrating an example WTRU 102. As shown inFIG. 2 , the WTRU 102 may include a processor 118, a transceiver 120, atransmit/receive element 122, a speaker/microphone 124, a keypad 126, adisplay/touchpad 128, non-removable memory 130, removable memory 132, apower source 134, a global positioning system (GPS) chipset 136, and/orother peripherals 138, among others. It will be appreciated that theWTRU 102 may include any sub-combination of the foregoing elements whileremaining consistent with an embodiment.

The processor 118 may be a general purpose processor, a special purposeprocessor, a conventional processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), aplurality of microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in associationwith a DSP core, a controller, a microcontroller, Application SpecificIntegrated Circuits (ASICs), Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGAs)circuits, any other type of integrated circuit (IC), a state machine,and the like. The processor 118 may perform signal coding, dataprocessing, power control, input/output processing, and/or any otherfunctionality that enables the WTRU 102 to operate in a wirelessenvironment. The processor 118 may be coupled to the transceiver 120,which may be coupled to the transmit/receive element 122. While FIG. 2depicts the processor 118 and the transceiver 120 as separatecomponents, it will be appreciated that the processor 118 and thetransceiver 120 may be integrated together in an electronic package orchip.

The transmit/receive element 122 may be configured to transmit signalsto and/or receive signals from, a base station (e.g., the base station114 a) over the air interface 115/116/117. For example, in oneembodiment, the transmit/receive element 122 may be an antennaconfigured to transmit and/or receive RF signals. In another embodiment,the transmit/receive element 122 may be an emitter/detector configuredto transmit and/or receive IR, UV, or visible light signals, forexample. In yet another embodiment, the transmit/receive element 122 maybe configured to transmit and/or receive both RF and light signals. Itwill be appreciated that the transmit/receive element 122 may beconfigured to transmit and/or receive any combination of wirelesssignals.

Although the transmit/receive element 122 is depicted in FIG. 2 as asingle element, the WTRU 102 may include any number of transmit/receiveelements 122. More specifically, the WTRU 102 may employ MIMOtechnology. Thus, in one embodiment, the WTRU 102 may include two ormore transmit/receive elements 122 (e.g., multiple antennas) fortransmitting and/or receiving wireless signals over the air interface115/116/117.

The transceiver 120 may be configured to modulate the signals that areto be transmitted by the transmit/receive element 122 and/or todemodulate the signals that are received by the transmit/receive element122. As noted above, the WTRU 102 may have multi-mode capabilities.Thus, the transceiver 120 may include multiple transceivers for enablingthe WTRU 102 to communicate via multiple RATs, such as UTRA and IEEE802.11, for example.

The processor 118 of the WTRU 102 may be coupled to, and may receiveuser input data from, the speaker/microphone 124, the keypad 126, and/orthe display/touchpad 128 (e.g., a liquid crystal display (LCD) displayunit or organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display unit). The processor118 may also output user data to the speaker/microphone 124, the keypad126, and/or the display/touchpad 128. In addition, the processor 118 mayaccess information from, and store data in, any type of suitable memory,such as the non-removable memory 130 and/or the removable memory 132.The non-removable memory 130 may include random-access memory (RAM),read-only memory (ROM), a hard disk, or any other type of memory storagedevice. The removable memory 132 may include a subscriber identitymodule (SIM) card, a memory stick, a secure digital (SD) memory card,and the like. In other embodiments, the processor 118 may accessinformation from, and store data in, memory that is not physicallylocated on the WTRU 102, such as on a server or a home computer (notshown).

The processor 118 may receive power from the power source 134, and maybe configured to distribute and/or control the power to the othercomponents in the WTRU 102. The power source 134 may be any suitabledevice for powering the WTRU 102. For example, the power source 134 mayinclude one or more dry cell batteries (e.g., nickel-cadmium (NiCd),nickel-zinc (NiZn), nickel metal hydride (NiMH), lithium-ion (Li-ion),etc.), solar cells, fuel cells, and the like.

The processor 118 may be coupled to the GPS chipset 136, which may beconfigured to provide location information (e.g., longitude andlatitude) regarding the current location of the WTRU 102. In additionto, or in lieu of, the information from the GPS chipset 136, the WTRU102 may receive location information over the air interface 115/116/117from a base station (e.g., base stations 114 a, 114 b) and/or determineits location based on the timing of the signals being received from twoor more nearby base stations. It will be appreciated that the WTRU 102may acquire location information by way of any suitablelocation-determination method while remaining consistent with anembodiment.

The processor 118 may be coupled to other peripherals 138, which mayinclude one or more software and/or hardware modules that provideadditional features, functionality and/or wired or wirelessconnectivity. For example, the peripherals 138 may include anaccelerometer, an e-compass, a satellite transceiver, a digital camera(for photographs and/or video), a universal serial bus (USB) port, avibration device, a television transceiver, a hands free headset, aBluetooth® module, a frequency modulated (FM) radio unit, a digitalmusic player, a media player, a video game player module, an Internetbrowser, and the like.

The WTRU 102 may include a full duplex radio for which transmission andreception of some or all of the signals (e.g., associated withparticular subframes for both the UL (e.g., for transmission) and DL(e.g. for reception) may be, for example partially or fully, concurrentand/or simultaneous. The full duplex radio may include an interferencemanagement unit 139 to reduce and/or substantially eliminate SINTF viaeither hardware (e.g., a choke) or signal processing via a processor(e.g., a separate processor (not shown) or via processor 118).

FIG. 3 is a system diagram illustrating the RAN 103 and the core network106 according to another embodiment. As noted above, the RAN 103 mayemploy a UTRA radio technology to communicate with the WTRUs 102 a, 102b, 102 c over the air interface 115. The RAN 103 may also be incommunication with the core network 106. As shown in FIG. 3 , the RAN103 may include Node-Bs 140 a, 140 b, 140 c, which may each include oneor more transceivers for communicating with the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102c over the air interface 115. The Node-Bs 140 a, 140 b, 140 c may eachbe associated with a particular cell (not shown) within the RAN 103. TheRAN 103 may also include RNCs 142 a, 142 b. It will be appreciated thatthe RAN 103 may include any number of Node-Bs and RNCs while remainingconsistent with an embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 3 , the Node-Bs 140 a, 140 b may be in communicationwith the RNC 142 a. Additionally, the Node-B 140 c may be incommunication with the RNC 142 b. The Node-Bs 140 a, 140 b, 140 c maycommunicate with the respective RNCs 142 a, 142 b via an Iub interface.The RNCs 142 a, 142 b may be in communication with one another via anIur interface. Each of the RNCs 142 a, 142 b may be configured tocontrol the respective Node-Bs 140 a, 140 b, 140 c to which it isconnected. In addition, each of the RNCs 142 a, 142 b may be configuredto carry out or support other functionality, such as outer loop powercontrol, load control, admission control, packet scheduling, handovercontrol, macrodiversity, security functions, data encryption, and thelike.

The core network 106 shown in FIG. 3 may include a media gateway (MGW)144, a mobile switching center (MSC) 146, a serving GPRS support node(SGSN) 148, and/or a gateway GPRS support node (GGSN) 150. While each ofthe foregoing elements are depicted as part of the core network 106, itwill be appreciated that any one of these elements may be owned and/oroperated by an entity other than the core network operator.

The RNC 142 a in the RAN 103 may be connected to the MSC 146 in the corenetwork 106 via an IuCS interface. The MSC 146 may be connected to theMGW 144. The MSC 146 and the MGW 144 may provide the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b,102 c with access to circuit-switched networks, such as the PSTN 108, tofacilitate communications between the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c andtraditional land-line communications devices.

The RNC 142 a in the RAN 103 may also be connected to the SGSN 148 inthe core network 106 via an IuPS interface. The SGSN 148 may beconnected to the GGSN 150. The SGSN 148 and the GGSN 150 may provide theWTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c with access to packet-switched networks, suchas the Internet 110, to facilitate communications between and the WTRUs102 a, 102 b, 102 c and IP-enabled devices.

As noted above, the core network 106 may also be connected to the othernetworks 112, which may include other wired and/or wireless networksthat are owned and/or operated by other service providers.

FIG. 4 is a system diagram illustrating the RAN 104 and the core network107 according to an embodiment. As noted above, the RAN 104 may employan E-UTRA radio technology to communicate with the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b,102 c over the air interface 116. The RAN 104 may also be incommunication with the core network 107.

The RAN 104 may include eNode-Bs 160 a, 160 b, 160 c, though it will beappreciated that the RAN 104 may include any number of eNode-Bs whileremaining consistent with an embodiment. The eNode-Bs 160 a, 160 b, 160c may each include one or more transceivers for communicating with theWTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c over the air interface 116. In one embodiment,the eNode-Bs 160 a, 160 b, 160 c may implement MIMO technology. Thus,the eNode-B 160 a, for example, may use multiple antennas to transmitwireless signals to, and/or receive wireless signals from, the WTRU 102a.

Each of the eNode-Bs 160 a, 160 b, 160 c may be associated with aparticular cell (not shown) and may be configured to handle radioresource management decisions, handover decisions, scheduling of usersin the UL and/or DL, and the like. As shown in FIG. 4 , the eNode-Bs 160a, 160 b, 160 c may communicate with one another over an X2 interface.The eNode-B may include a full duplex radio similar to that of the WTRU(e.g., with an interference management unit). The core network 107 shownin FIG. 4 may include a mobility management entity (MME) 162, a servinggateway (SGW) 164, and a packet data network (PDN) gateway (or PGW) 166.While each of the foregoing elements are depicted as part of the corenetwork 107, it will be appreciated that any of these elements may beowned and/or operated by an entity other than the core network operator.

The MME 162 may be connected to each of the eNode-Bs 162 a, 162 b, 162 cin the RAN 104 via an S1 interface and may serve as a control node. Forexample, the MME 162 may be responsible for authenticating users of theWTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c, bearer activation/deactivation, selecting aparticular serving gateway during an initial attach of the WTRUs 102 a,102 b, 102 c, and the like. The MME 162 may provide a control planefunction for switching between the RAN 104 and other RANs (not shown)that employ other radio technologies, such as GSM and/or WCDMA.

The serving gateway 164 may be connected to each of the eNode-Bs 160 a,160 b, 160 c in the RAN 104 via the S1 interface. The serving gateway164 may generally route and forward user data packets to/from the WTRUs102 a, 102 b, 102 c. The serving gateway 164 may perform otherfunctions, such as anchoring user planes during inter-eNode-B handovers,triggering paging when DL data is available for the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b,102 c, managing and storing contexts of the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c,and the like.

The serving gateway 164 may be connected to the PDN gateway 166, whichmay provide the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c with access to packet-switchednetworks, such as the Internet 110, to facilitate communications betweenthe WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c and IP-enabled devices.

The core network 107 may facilitate communications with other networks.For example, the core network 107 may provide the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b,102 c with access to circuit-switched networks, such as the PSTN 108, tofacilitate communications between the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c andtraditional land-line communications devices. For example, the corenetwork 107 may include, or may communicate with, an IP gateway (e.g.,an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) server) that serves as an interfacebetween the core network 107 and the PSTN 108. In addition, the corenetwork 107 may provide the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c with access to theother networks 112, which may include other wired and/or wirelessnetworks that are owned and/or operated by other service providers.

FIG. 5 is a system diagram illustrating the RAN 105 and the core network109 according to an embodiment. The RAN 105 may be an access servicenetwork (ASN) that employs IEEE 802.16 radio technology to communicatewith the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c over the air interface 117. As willbe further discussed below, the communication links between thedifferent functional entities of the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c, the RAN105, and the core network 109 may be defined as reference points.

As shown in FIG. 5 , the RAN 105 may include base stations 180 a, 180 b,180 c, and an ASN gateway 182, though it will be appreciated that theRAN 105 may include any number of base stations and ASN gateways whileremaining consistent with an embodiment. The base stations 180 a, 180 b,180 c may each be associated with a particular cell (not shown) in theRAN 105 and may each include one or more transceivers for communicatingwith the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c over the air interface 117. In oneembodiment, the base stations 180 a, 180 b, 180 c may implement MIMOtechnology. The base station 180 a, for example, may use multipleantennas to transmit wireless signals to, and/or receive wirelesssignals from, the WTRU 102 a. The base stations 180 a, 180 b, 180 c mayalso provide mobility management functions, such as handoff triggering,tunnel establishment, radio resource management, traffic classification,quality of service (QoS) policy enforcement, and the like. The ASNgateway 182 may serve as a traffic aggregation point and may beresponsible for paging, caching of subscriber profiles, routing to thecore network 109, and the like.

The air interface 117 between the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c and the RAN105 may be defined as an R1 reference point that implements the IEEE802.16 specification. In addition, each of the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 cmay establish a logical interface (not shown) with the core network 109.The logical interface between the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c and the corenetwork 109 may be defined as an R2 reference point, which may be usedfor authentication, authorization, IP host configuration management,and/or mobility management.

The communication link between each of the base stations 180 a, 180 b,180 c may be defined as an R8 reference point that includes protocolsfor facilitating WTRU handovers and the transfer of data between basestations. The communication link between the base stations 180 a, 180 b,180 c and the ASN gateway 182 may be defined as an R6 reference point.The R6 reference point may include protocols for facilitating mobilitymanagement based on mobility events associated with each of the WTRUs102 a, 102 b, 102 c.

As shown in FIG. 5 , the RAN 105 may be connected to the core network109. The communication link between the RAN 105 and the core network 109may be defined as an R3 reference point that includes protocols forfacilitating data transfer and mobility management capabilities, forexample. The core network 109 may include a mobile IP home agent(MIP-HA) 184, an authentication, authorization, accounting (AAA) server186, and a gateway 188. While each of the foregoing elements aredepicted as part of the core network 109, it will be appreciated thatany of these elements may be owned and/or operated by an entity otherthan the core network operator.

The MIP-HA 184 may be responsible for IP address management, and mayenable the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c to roam between different ASNsand/or different core networks. The MIP-HA 184 may provide the WTRUs 102a, 102 b, 102 c with access to packet-switched networks, such as theInternet 110, to facilitate communications between the WTRUs 102 a, 102b, 102 c and IP-enabled devices. The AAA server 186 may be responsiblefor user authentication and for supporting user services. The gateway188 may facilitate interworking with other networks. For example, thegateway 188 may provide the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c with access tocircuit-switched networks, such as the PSTN 108, to facilitatecommunications between the WTRUs 102 a, 102 b, 102 c and traditionalland-line communications devices. The gateway 188 may provide the WTRUs102 a, 102 b, 102 c with access to the other networks 112, which mayinclude other wired and/or wireless networks that are owned and/oroperated by other service providers.

Although not shown in FIG. 5 , it will be appreciated that the RAN 105may be connected to other ASNs, other RANs (e.g., RANs 103 and/or 104)and/or the core network 109 may be connected to other core networks(e.g., core network 106 and/or 107. The communication link between theRAN 105 and the other ASNs may be defined as an R4 reference point,which may include protocols for coordinating the mobility of the WTRUs102 a, 102 b, 102 c between the RAN 105 and the other ASNs. Thecommunication link between the core network 109 and the other corenetworks may be defined as an R5 reference, which may include protocolsfor facilitating interworking between home core networks and visitedcore networks.

Although the WTRU is described in FIGS. 1-5 as a wireless terminal, itis contemplated that in certain representative embodiments such aterminal may use (e.g., temporarily or permanently) wired communicationinterfaces with the communication network.

In a frequency division duplex (FDD) communication system, frequencyseparation may be used (e.g., implemented) to, for example, reduceinterference between the transmitted and received signals. In a singlecarrier (also referred to as single channel) configuration,communication between a network and a user device such as a userequipment (UE) or WTRU may use, for example, two or more frequency bands(e.g., one frequency band in the UL for communication to the network andone frequency band in the DL for communication from the network). Enoughspacing may be provided between the UL and DL channels, for example, forfilters to be able to adequately attenuate (e.g., below a thresholdlevel) energy from the transmitted signal that may leak into thereceived signal.

In a time division duplex (TDD) system, time separation may be used(e.g., implemented) to, for example, reduce interference between thetransmitted and received signals. In a single carrier (or singlechannel) configuration, communication may use a single band, which maybe shared in time between UL and DL. In a system, such as 3GPP LTE TDD,a frame (e.g., a 10 ms frame) may be divided into subframes (e.g., ten 1ms subframes) and each subframe may be used for DL (D), for UL (U), oras a special subframe (S), which may include a DL part, a UL part, and agap between the DL part and the UL part to allow for transition from DLto UL or UL to DL.

In a full duplex (FD) system, a channel may be used to transmit andreceive the radio frequency (RF) signal simultaneously. In a TDD-typesystem, timeslots may be allocated as DL, UL, or full duplex singlechannel (FDSC). Timeslots which arc allocated as FDSC may be used forsimultaneous UL and DL communication between an FDSC-capable basestation(BS) and an FDSC-capable WTRU. FDSC timeslots may be used by anFDSC-capable base station for simultaneous communication with at leastone WTRU in the DL and at least one other WTRU in the UL (e.g., when theWTRUs may or may not be FDSC-capable). FDSC may correspond to one ormore of: (1) transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) bands, which may beseparated by a gap (e.g., a small gap), such as one not supportable byconventional systems; (2) Tx and Rx bands which may be separated by azero band gap; (3) partially overlapping Tx and Rx bands; and/or (4)fully overlapping Tx and Rx bands. The term FDSC may be usedinterchangeably with full duplex radio (FDR), full duplex singlefrequency (FDSF), and/or full duplex single resource (FDSR).

In 3GPP TDD LTE, the “timeslots” may be, for example, 1 ms subframes ofa 10 ms LTE frame and the TDD UL-DL configurations (e.g., defined in the3GPP specifications) may be modified to include full duplex (F)subframes (e.g., in place of some or all of the U, D, and/or Ssubframes). Subframes may be split between the UL and the DL at aResource Block (RB) level. The RB may be a unit of resource allocationand may correspond to a plurality of subcarriers (e.g., 12 subcarriers)in frequency and a number of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing(OFDM) symbols in time.

Procedures such as Radio Resource Management (RRM) procedures may assigntimeslots for FDSC operation, may choose WTRUs (e.g., for operation orresource assignments in FDSC timeslots) that are suitable for Tx and/orRx in FDSC timeslots, and/or may pair WTRUs for half-duplex (UL or DL)operation in the same timeslot. The RRM may implement such assignments,choices, and/or pairings such that Tx interference or leakage into Rx(e.g., Tx-Rx coupling) does not prevent the successful reception of theRx signal. Measurements, capabilities (e.g., WTRU capabilities), and/orWTRU location among other factors may, for example, be taken intoaccount in the assignments, choices, and/or pairings. For example,limiting FDSC communication to WTRUs close to (e.g., within a thresholddistance from) the base station may be one way to limit interference.

In certain representative embodiments, Tx-Rx interference mitigationprocedures are implemented for handling and/or reducing various types ofTx-Rx interference.

Although 3GPP LTE FDD and TDD systems are illustrated, it iscontemplated that the procedures are applicable to other systems,methods and/or devices.

In certain representative embodiments, procedures may be implemented tomitigate various types of interference including one or more of: (1)eNode-B (eNB) SINTF for which an eNB transmission (e.g., DL transmissionof the eNB) may interfere with its own reception (e.g., UL reception ofthe cNB); (2) WTRU SINTF for which a transmission (e.g., a ULtransmission) of the WTRU may interfere with its own reception (e.g., DLreception of the WTRU); (3) WTRU NINTF for which a transmission (e.g., aUL transmission) of one WTRU may interfere with reception (e.g., a DLreception) of another WTRU.

In certain representative embodiments, procedures may be implemented tomitigate interference using for example, collision avoidance and/orpower control. For example, procedures may be implemented to handletransmission power adjustment (e.g., reduction) for certain channels,such as for data channels and/or for other channels. Transmission powerand corresponding interference in FDSC subframes may be reduced and/orlimited, for example, by applying FDSC to certain WTRUs (e.g., thoseWTRUs which are close to the base station (e.g., close-in WTRUs)).

In certain representative embodiments, other procedures (e.g., collisionavoidance procedures and other procedures) may be implemented for otherchannels and/or signals (e.g., control and/or reference channels and/orsignals, among others) that may be present in those subframes. Theseother procedures may mitigate or reduce interference in combination withand/or without transmission power reduction, as transmission powerreduction may limit the effective range of the channels and/or signals.

For example, collision avoidance procedures may be implemented to handleinterference from certain signals in the DL (e.g., control channelsand/or RSs, which may be transmitted at high power in order to reach thecell edge, for example the Physical DL Control Channel (PDCCH) orCell-specific RS (CRS)). At the eNB, these signals may cause excessiveSINTF to a UL received signal which may use the same time/frequencyresources. Since these signals may, for example, be present in allsubframes and/or may span many RBs across the entire system bandwidth,and it may not be useful and/or practical to avoid using subframesand/or RBs containing or including these signals for FDSCcommunications, collision avoidance procedures may be implemented tohandle interference in subframes and/or RBs in which these (or other)signals may be present.

Similarly, collision avoidance procedures may be implemented where WTRUSINTF and/or NINTF may arise, for example, when a WTRU transmits aSounding RS (SRS). The SRS may be transmitted by a WTRU in the lastsymbol of certain subframes and may span the entire UL bandwidth. TheSRS may have a power requirement higher than that for other UL signalsor channels (e.g., data channels), which may cause interference (e.g.,excessive interference) to signals in that symbol in the DL which may bereceived by the same or another WTRU.

In certain representative embodiments, procedures to reduceinterference, for example of the Tx (e.g., the signals which may betransmitted) into the Rx (e.g., the signals which may be received) maybe implemented. For example, representative procedures are provided thataddress the interference to and/or from signals and signal types inopposite directions. The terms signals and channels may be usedinterchangeably.

In certain representative embodiments, UL resource muting (e.g.,blanking, puncturing and/or rate-matching) may be based on the DLchannel and/or the RS location. For example, PUSCH RE muting may occur(or may be performed) to avoid collisions with at least one of thefollowing: the Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS), the SecondarySynchronization Signal (SSS), the Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH), theCRS, and/or the DM-RS. In other examples, a PUCCH may be shortened toavoid collisions with a PDCCH.

In certain representative embodiments, PUSCH prioritization (e.g.,relative to a DL channel or signal) may depend on whether the PUSCHcontains or includes certain information types (e.g., UL ControlInformation (UCI), etc.).

In certain representative embodiments, DL resource muting (e.g.,blanking, puncturing and/or rate-matching) may be based on the ULchannel and/or the RS location. For example, PDSCH RE muting may occurto avoid collisions with the PUCCH and/or the Physical Random AccessChannel (PRACH). As other examples, the PDSCH RE muting may occur (or beperformed) to avoid collisions with the PUSCH and/or the PUSCH DM-RS. Incertain examples, the PDSCH RE muting (e.g., shortened PDSCH) may occur(or may be performed) to avoid collision with the SRS.

In certain representative embodiments, PDSCH prioritization (e.g.,relative to a UL channel or signal) may depend on whether the PDSCHcontains or includes certain information types (e.g., System InformationBlock (SIB), and/or Medium Access Control (MAC) Control Element (CE),among others).

In certain representative embodiments, PDCCH RE muting may occur (or maybe performed) to avoid collisions in the opposite direction (e.g., withthe UL).

In certain representative embodiments, unequal power control for the DLand/or the UL may be implemented. For example, unequal power allocationmay be implemented for the PDSCH according to the UL channel that may beinterfered with (e.g., SINTF which may occur at the eNB) by the PDSCH.In certain representative embodiments, associated power allocationindications may be implemented to indicate, for example, the unequalpower allocations (e.g., to the WTRU). As other examples, unequal powerallocation may be implemented for the PUSCH according to the DL channelthat may be interfered with (e.g., SINTF which may occur at the WTRU) bythe PUSCH. In certain representative embodiments, an associated powercontrol loop (or multiple power control loops) may be implemented.

In certain representative embodiments, SINTF handling procedures and/orNINTF handling procedures may be implemented. For example, proceduresfor discovery or determination of SINTF subframe and/or NINTF subframemay be implemented. As other examples, procedures may be implemented forSINTF handling and/or NINTF handling when subframes are determined to beSINTF subframes and/or NINTF subframes.

In certain representative embodiments, a supportable SINTF level (SIL)and/or SIL reporting may be implemented. For example, procedures may beimplemented to provide power control (e.g., maximum power control) toenable (or maintain) operations of the WTRU within the supportable SIL.

In certain representative embodiments, procedures may be implemented tosupport multimedia broadcast multicast service single frequency network(MBSFN) subframe usage in a full-duplex operation.

The representative procedures for reducing interference may includecollision avoidance procedures including, for example: blanking,puncturing, and/or rate matching around and/or for certain locations(e.g., time and/or frequency locations) in one direction (e.g., ULand/or DL) which may correspond to the locations (e.g., time and/orfrequency locations) of certain channels and/or signals (e.g., highpriority signals) in the other direction (e.g., the DL and/or the UL).

The representative procedures for reducing interference may includecollision avoidance procedures including, for example, subframe and/ortransmission modifications in one direction (e.g., the UL and/or the DL)to avoid collisions with and/or between certain signal types (e.g., oneor more control channels and/or RSs) in the opposite direction (e.g.,the DL and/or the UL). In certain representative embodiments,modifications may be made or provided to any of: the UL the DM-RSs,DM-RSs, and/or other RSs. In certain representative embodiments,transmissions may be shortened to avoid conflict (e.g., the PUCCH regionmay be shortened to avoid the PDCCH region and/or the PDSCH region maybe shortened to avoid the SRS symbol for example, from the oppositedirection).

The representative procedures for reducing interference may includepower control procedures including, for example: power control such that(1) transmission power in one direction (e.g., the UL and/or DLdirection) may be controlled based on the time/frequency location (e.g.,of the transmission) and/or the types of signals, which may be presentin the same time/frequency location (e.g., of the transmission) in theopposite direction; and/or (2) transmission power of certaintime/frequency locations associated with a signal may have differentpower or power control from other time/frequency locations associatedthe same signal, (and in certain representative embodiments, anindication of the power offset (e.g., which may be used and/or required)may be provided).

In certain representative embodiments, high priority signals may includeat least one of: (1) a DL synchronization channel, e.g., the PSS and/orthe SSS, among others; (2) a DL broadcast channel, e.g., the PBCH andother broadcast channels; (3) a DL RS, e.g., a CRS, a DM-RS, and/or aPositioning RS (PRS), among others; (4) a DL control channel, e.g.,PDCCH, a Physical Control Format Indicator Channel (PCFICH), a PhysicalHybrid automatic repeat request Indicator Channel (PHICH), and/or anEnhanced Physical Downlink Control Channel (EPDCCH), among others; (5) aUL control channel, e.g., PUCCH; and/or (6) a UL RS, e.g., the UL DM-RS,and/or the SRS, among others.

A typical FDSC communications application may be one in which the WTRUsinvolved may be close to the base station, which may result in lowerpower transmissions that may result (e.g., likely result) in lessinterference. For close-in WTRUs, UL and DL transmissions may be (e.g.,may likely be) close to time aligned. In certain representativeembodiments, FDSC applications may be applied to close-in WTRUs (e.g.,for which the UL and the DL may or may not be time aligned or close totime aligned). In the same or other representative embodiments, the FDSCapplications may be applied to WTRUs that are not close-in (e.g., forwhich the UL and the DL may not be time aligned or close to timealigned).

In certain representative embodiments, procedures may be implemented foraddressing SINTF including detection, handling and/or reporting ofSINTF.

Wireless communication systems compliant with Third GenerationPartnership Project (3GPP) Long Term Evolution (LTE) may support up to100 Mbps in the DL, and up to 50 Mbps in the UL for a 2×2 configuration.The LTE DL scheme may be based on an Orthogonal Frequency DivisionMultiple Access (OFDMA) air interface. Each radio frame may consist often subframes of 1 ms each. Each subframe may consist of two timeslotsof 0.5 ms each. There may be either seven or six OFDM symbols pertimeslot. Seven symbols per timeslot may be used with normal CP length,and six symbols per timeslot may be used with extended CP length. Thesubcarrier spacing for a particular specification may be 15 kHz. Areduced subcarrier spacing mode using 7.5 kHz may also be possible. Theterms “frame” and “radio frame” may be used interchangeably.

A RE may correspond to one subcarrier during one OFDM symbol interval.Twelve consecutive subcarriers during a 0.5 ms timeslot may constituteone RB. With seven symbols per timeslot, each RB may consist of 12×7=84REs.

The basic time-domain unit for dynamic scheduling may be one subframeand may include two consecutive timeslots. This may be referred to as aRB pair or a Physical RB pair. Certain subcarriers on some OFDM symbolsmay be allocated to carry pilot or RSs in the time-frequency grid. Anumber of subcarriers at the edges of the transmission bandwidth may notbe transmitted to comply with spectral mask uses and/or requirements.

UL channels which may be provided and/or used may include the PUSCHand/or the PUCCH. Control information, which may be referred to as UCImay be transmitted by the WTRU, for example in a subframe, on the PUSCHor the PUCCH, and/or part may be transmitted on the PUCCH and part maybe transmitted on the PUSCH. The UCI may include one or more of: (1) aHybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) ACK/NACK, (2) a schedulingrequest (SR), and/or (3) Channel State Information (CSI) which mayinclude one or more of: (i) a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) (2) aPrecoding Matrix Indicator (PMT), and/or (3) a Rank Indicator (RT).Resources which may be allocated for the PUCCH transmission may belocated at or near the edges of the UL band.

DL channels, which may be provided and/or used, may include the PDSCHand/or DL control channels which may include one or more of: the PCFTCH,the PHTCH, the PDCCH, and/or the EPDCCH.

A plurality of symbols (e.g., the first 1 to 3 OFDM symbols) in eachsubframe in the DL may be occupied by one or more of: (1) the PCFICH,the PHICH, and/or the PDCCH according to the overhead of the controlchannels. The symbols in this region may be referred to as the DLcontrol region. The PCFICH may be transmitted in the 1st OFDM symbol(e.g., symbol 0) in each subframe and/or may indicate the number of OFDMsymbols used for the DL control region in the subframe. A WTRU maydetect a Control Format Indicator (CFI) from the PCFICH and the DLcontrol region may be defined in the subframe according to the CFIvalue. The PCFICH may be skipped, if a subframe is defined as and/or isa non-PDSCH supportable subframe. DL symbols, which arc not part of a DLcontrol region, may be referred to as the data or PDSCH region. TheEPDCCH may be provided and/or used in the PDSCH region. The location ofthe EPDCCH in that region may be signaled, for example via higher layersignaling such as Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, to a WTRU thatmay (or may be expected to) monitor, receive or otherwise use thatEPDCCH. The PDCCH and/or the EPDCCH may provide control information,resource allocations (e.g., grants) for the UL transmission and/or theDL transmission, and the like.

DL signals and/or channels may be provided or transmitted by an eNBand/or may be received and/or used by a WTRU. The UL signals and/orchannels may be provided or transmitted by the WTRU and/or may bereceived and/or used by the eNB.

Signals and/or channels may be associated with a cell, which maycorrespond to a certain carrier frequency and/or geographic area. Acarrier frequency may be a center frequency of a cell (e.g., the centerfrequency of a cell's supported bandwidth). The eNB may have one or moreassociated cells. The eNB and cell (e.g., its associated cell) may incertain representative embodiments be used or referred tointerchangeably.

Synchronization signals, which may include for example the PSS and/orthe SSS, may be provided and/or transmitted, for example by the eNB orcell. Such signals may be used by the WTRU to acquire time and/orfrequency synchronization with the eNB or cell. The PSS and/or the SSSmay be present, for example in subframes 0 and/or 5, and/or may bepresent in every radio frame. Transmission may be on subcarriers (e.g.,62 subcarriers) at the center of a bandwidth of a cell. Five subcarrierson each side of the 62 subcarriers used for transmission of thesynchronization signals may be reserved and/or unused. For FDD, PSStransmission may be in the last OFDM symbol and SSS transmission may bein the 2nd to last (e.g., next to last) OFDM symbol, for example, oftimeslot 0 (e.g., the first timeslot of subframe 0) and/or timeslot 10(e.g., the first timeslot of subframe 5) of each radio frame. For TDD,the PSS transmission may be in the 3rd OFDM symbol in subframe 1 and/orsubframe 6 and/or the SSS transmission may be in the last OFDM symbol intimeslot 1 (e.g., the second timeslot of subframe 0) and/or timeslot 11(e.g., the second timeslot of subframe 5) of each radio frame. Thesynchronization signals may convey information regarding the physicalcell identity (cell TD) of the cell.

The PBCH, which may be transmitted by an eNB, may carry cell informationsuch as a Master Information Block (MIB). The PBCH may be providedand/or transmitted in subframe 0 of a radio frame (e.g. each radioframe) and may be repeated (e.g., in consecutive radio frames, forexample, each of four consecutive radio frames where four radio framesmay correspond to a 40 ms time period). The PBCH may be transmitted inthe first four OFDM symbols of the second timeslot of subframe 0 and maybe transmitted on subcarriers (e.g., 72 subcarriers) at or close to thecenter of the bandwidth of a cell. The MIB may provide information, forexample, (1) the DL bandwidth of the cell, (2) PHICH information, and/or(3) at least part of the System Frame Number (SFN), for example the mostsignificant bits (e.g., 8 bits of a 10-bit) of the SFN.

The DL RSs may include a DL CRS, a CSI RS (CSI-RS), a DM-RS, and/or aPRS. The DL RSs may be received and/or used by a WTRU. The DL CRS may beused by a WTRU for channel estimation for coherent demodulation of a(e.g., any) DL physical channel with certain possible exceptions. Forexample, the DL CRS may not be used for channel estimation and/orcoherent demodulation for certain DL channels, which may include atleast one of: (1) the Physical multicast channel (PMCH), (2) the EPDCCH,and/or (3) the PDSCH when configured with Transmission Mode (TM) 7(TM7), TM8, TM9, or TM10. The CRS may be used by a WTRU for CSImeasurements for the reporting of the CQI, the PMI, and/or the RI, forexample, if the WTRU is configured with a TM using the DL CRS for thePDSCH demodulation. The DL CRS may be used by the WTRU forcell-selection and/or mobility-related measurements. The DL CRS may bereceived in certain subframes (e.g., any subframe) and a plurality ofports (e.g., up to 4 antenna ports) may be supported. The DM-RS may beused by the WTRU for demodulation of certain channels which may includeat least one of the EPDCCH and/or the PDSCH configured with TM7, TM8,TM9, or TM10. The DM-RS, which may be used for the demodulation of acertain channel (e.g., the EPDCCH and/or the PDSCH, among others), maybe transmitted in the RBs assigned to the channel (e.g., the EPDCCHand/or the PDSCH). The CSI-RS, which may be transmitted with a dutycycle, may be used by the WTRU for the CSI measurements. The WTRU may beconfigured with a TM that may use the DM-RS for the PDSCH demodulation.Certain possible exceptions may exist, for example, DM-RS may not beused for the PDSCH demodulation when certain TMs, such as TM7 and/or TM8are configured and/or used). The CSI-RS may be used for cell-selectionand/or mobility-related measurements (for example, if a WTRU isconfigured with a certain TM (e.g., TM10). The PRS may be used by a WTRUfor position related measurements.

The UL RSs, which may include the SRS, and/or the DM-RS, among others,may be transmitted by the WTRU. The SRS may be transmitted in the lastSC-FDMA symbol in the UL subframes, which may be configured asWTRU-specific SRS subframes. The WTRU-specific SRS subframes may be asubset of the cell-specific SRS subframes. The SRS may be transmitted bythe WTRU dynamically, periodically or aperiodically in the WTRU-specificSRS subframes within a configured and/or predefined frequency bandwidth.The SRS may be transmitted by the WTRU in an aperiodic or periodicmanner. For example, the WTRU may transmit SRS in response to (e.g.,following reception of) an aperiodic SRS (A-SRS) transmission triggerwhich the WTRU may receive in Downlink Control Information (DCI). TheDM-RS may be transmitted by the WTRU for the PUSCH demodulation at theeNB receiver and the location of the DM-RS may be in the middle of theSC-FDMA symbols (e.g., the 4th SC-FDMA symbol of a subframe using normalCP) in each slot for the RBs for which the PUSCH transmission may begranted.

In certain representative embodiments, for example, which may use TDDsuch as LTE TDD, multiple (e.g., one or more) TDD UL-DL subframeconfigurations may be available, identified, supported, specified,and/or otherwise known, and one (or at least one) of the subframeconfigurations may be used in the eNB. Each TDD UL-DL subframeconfiguration may contain or include at least one of a DL subframe, a ULsubframe and/or a special subframe as shown, for example in Table 1herein in which a DL subframe is indicated by a ‘ID’, a UL subframe isindicated by a ‘U’, and a special subframe is indicated by an ‘S’. TheeNB may communicate with a WTRU in a subframe in the direction indicatedby the configuration that the eNB uses. Communication (e.g., directionof communication) in a special subframe may be in accordance with aspecial subframe configuration which may provide or identify the sizeand/or location(s) of a DL and/or UL part of the subframe.

TABLE 1 Example TDD LTE UL-DL Configurations DL-to-UL UL-DL Switch-pointSubframe number Configuration periodicity 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 5 ms D SU U U D S U U U 1 5 ms D S U U D D S U U D 2 5 ms D S U D D D S U D D 310 ms  D S U U U D D D D D 4 10 ms  D S U U D D D D D D 5 10 ms  D S U DD D D D D D 6 5 ms D S U U U D S U U D

The WTRU may receive user plane data and/or control plane data in aPDSCH transmission from the eNB. The WTRU may receive Radio Control Link(RLC) and/or MAC control information in the PDSCH transmission from theeNB. The WTRU may receive one or more of the following MAC controlelements (CEs) in the PDSCH: (1) Random Access Response (RAR) MACprotocol data unit (PDU); and/or (2) a WTRU contention resolution MACCE, among others.

The RAR may contain or include one or more sets of: a Timing AlignmentCommand, a UL grant for msg3 transmission, and/or a temporary Cell RadioNetwork Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI). The WTRU, based on the randomaccess preamble index (RAPID) used, may use the RAR information toperform the transmission of the msg3. The RAR may be sent by a commonRNTT (e.g., a Random Access (RA)-RNTI) on the PDCCH in a common searchspace (CSS) and the RAPID may be used by multiple WTRUs.

The WTRU may receive the contention resolution MAC CE during acontention based Random Access (RA) procedure to identify that the msg3may have been or was properly received by the network. The message maybe WTRU specific, although multiple WTRUs may receive the contentionresolution CE. The WTRU may determine that it is the intended recipientof the CE by finding the Common Control Channel (CCCH) Service Data Unit(SDU) (e.g., using the RRC connection request message) the WTRUtransmitted (e.g., in msg3) in the CE content.

The RAR MAC PDU and the contention resolution MAC CE may be addressed toand/or received by multiple WTRUs using the RA-RNTI and the temporaryC-RNTI, respectively. The following MAC CEs may be WTRU specific: (1) anActivation/Deactivation CE (e.g., the Activation/Deactivation CE may beincluded in the PDSCH for a WTRU configured for carrier aggregation toactivate or deactivate certain secondary serving cells); (2) aDiscontinuous Reception (DRX) command CE (e.g., the DRX command CE maybe included in the PDSCH to indicate the start and/or the stop of a DRXcycle for a WTRU that may have been configured for connected mode DRX);and/or (3) a Timing Advance Command CE (e.g., the Timing Advance CommandMAC CE may be included in the PDSCH for a WTRU to provide the WTRU witha timing advance command for the UL transmissions), among others.

The WTRU may receive one or more of the following types of data andcontrol PDUs in the PDSCH: (1) a RLC data PDU which may consist of orinclude any of: (i) a transparent mode data PDU; (ii) an unacknowledgedmode data PDU; and/or (iii) an acknowledged mode (AM) data PDU. The AMdata PDU may be further categorized as a data PDU for an initialtransmission or for a re-transmission and a data PDU for re-transmissionmay include PDU segments. The AM data PDU may include a POLLING bit,which may be useful for the Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) functionalitywhich may be supported by the RLC AM functionality; and/or (2) an RLCSTATUS PDU which may be included in the PDSCH by the eNB to inform theWTRU of the RLC PDUs (e.g., UL RLC PDUs) that have been successfullyreceived and/or the RLC service data units (SDUs) (e.g., the UL SDUs)that have yet to be detected. The WTRU may include an RLC STATUS PDU inthe PUSCH to inform the eNB of the RLC PDUs (e.g., DL RLC PDUs) thathave been successfully received and/or the RLC SDUs (e.g., DL SDUs) thathave yet to be detected.

The term “node” generally refers to or represents a user equipment (UE)a WTRU, or other device, an eNB or a cell such as a macrocell, apicocell, a femtocell, a home eNB, a relay, a remote radio head (RRH),and/or a small cell, among others. The term “at the same time” generallyrefers to sending and/or receiving signals, messages and/or control oruser data at the same instance, concurrently, coincidently, and/orsimultaneously. For example, the sending and/or receiving of thesignals, messages and/or control or user data may, for example, overlapin time either partially or fully.

One or more representative embodiments described herein may be used in afull-duplex radio (FDR) resource (FDRR). An FDRR may include one or moreof the following: a resource in which a node (e.g., an eNB and/or WTRU)may transmit and receive signals in a same time/frequency resource. TheFDRR may be a RE and/or a set of REs in which a node may transmit andreceive signals at the same time. The RE in which a node may transmitand receive signals at the same time is sometimes referred to as a FDRRE.

The FDRR may be a RB (e.g. physical RB (PRB) or PRB-pair) and/or a setof RBs in which a node may transmit and receive signals at the sametime. As an example, a set of REs within the RB may be used for a ULtransmission and another set of REs within the RB may be used for a DLreception where the set of REs for the UL transmission and the set ofREs for the DL reception may be non-overlapped, partially overlapped,and/or fully overlapped (e.g., the same set of REs). A RB, which mayinclude one or more FDR REs, may be referred to as a FDRR. A RB, whichmay be a FDRR, may be referred to as a FDR RB.

A FDRR may be a subframe and/or a set of subframes in which a node maytransmit and receive signals at the same time. As an example, a set ofRBs in or within the subframe may be used for a UL transmission andanother set of RBs may be used for a DL reception. In this case, the setof RBs for the UL transmission and the set of RBs for the DL receptionmay be non-overlapped, partially overlapped, and/or fully overlapped(e.g., the same set of RBs). A subframe, which may include one or moreof FDR RE and/or FDR RB, may be referred to as a FDRR. A subframe, whichmay be an FDRR, may be referred to as a FDR subframe. The FDR subframemay be a SINTF subframe and/or a NINTF subframe according to theinterference type (e.g., SINTF or NINTF in the opposite direction). Asubframe which may not include the FDR RE and/or the FDR RB may bereferred to as a non-FDR subframe. The non-FDR subframe may be a NINTFsubframe since SINITF may only exist in the FDR resource.

The operation of transmitting and receiving signals in a same FDRR,which may be at least one of a FDR RE, a FDR RB, and/or a FDR subframemay be referred to as a full-duplex (FD) operation.

Representative UL-DL Channel Collision Avoidance

RE muting procedures may be implemented or used to avoid collisions ofsignals. For a muted RE, puncturing and/or rate-matching may be used,for example in a coding chain perspective. When puncturing is used, asignal, which may be mapped to a punctured RE, may not be transmitted ormay be transmitted at zero power in that RE. When rate-matching is used,the mapping of signals to REs may avoid mapping to certain REs which mayresult in certain signals not being transmitted.

In one example, an N-bit coded bit sequence for a channel, for example(c1, . . . , cN), may be an output of a channel encoder with a payloador information as an input, where the channel encoder may implement anychannel code, for example, including a turbo code, a convolutional code,and/or a Reed-Muller code, among others. The coded bit sequence may bean input of a mapper. A M-symbol modulated symbol sequence, for example(x1, . . . , xM), may be an output of the mapper where the coded bitsequence may be modulated using a modulation scheme (for example, BinaryPhase Shift Keying (BPSK), Quaternary Phase Shift Keying (QPSK), 16Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (16QAM), or 64 Quadrature AmplitudeModulation (64QAM), among others). According to the modulation schemeused, the modulated symbol sequence length M may be equal to or smallerthan N.

The modulated symbol sequence may be mapped to a set of REs for thechannel according to a certain order (e.g., a predefined order). Forinstance, (x1, . . . , xM) may be mapped onto M REs, which may be usedfor the channel in the predefined order. If the k-th RE is muted (e.g.,where k≤M), for example due to a collision, puncturing may cause themodulated symbol Xk to not be transmitted. Rate-matching may cause themapper to skip REs which may be muted such that fewer modulated symbolsmay be mapped. For one rate-matched RE, M−1 modulated symbols may bemapped and transmitted. For example, (x1, . . . , xM−1) may betransmitted and one last modulated symbol may not be transmitted due tothe muting of the k-th RE. Puncturing may lose coded bits in thepositions of the muted REs, while the rate-matching may lose coded bitsfrom the last coded bits.

RE muting procedures with puncturing may be generally referred to as REpuncturing procedures and RE muting procedures with rate-matching may begenerally referred to as RE rate-matching procedures. RE mutingprocedures may include RE puncturing and/or RE rate-matching procedures.

In certain representative systems (e.g., LTE systems), the RE mutingprocedures may be performed to avoid collision between signals ofdifferent types in the same direction. For example, in the DL, PDSCH REsmay be muted to avoid collision with the CSI-RS and/or PRS REs may bemuted to avoid collision with the PSS and/or the SSS. In the UL, thePUSCH and/or the PUCCH may be shortened to avoid collision with the SRSin the UL.

In certain FDR systems, the RE muting procedures may be performed toavoid collision of signals in opposite directions (e.g., avoid collisionbetween resources in the UL with resources in the DL). The performanceand type of collision avoidance may be dependent on: (1) the signalsthemselves, (2) the priorities of the signals (for example, which may bepre-defined, configured, and/or signaled) and/or (3) other factors whichmay include when FDRRs may be used (e.g., if a subframe can be a FDRsubframe), and/or based on an eNB indication, among others.

Representative DL Channel Dependent Puncturing/Rate-Matching

RE puncturing procedures or RE rate-matching procedures may be used fora UL channel, if the RE of the UL channel may and/or does collide with aDL channel or a DL RS has a higher priority than the UL channel. REmuting procedures may generally refer to RE puncturing and/or RErate-matching procedures.

RE muting procedures may be used in SC-FDMA symbol level operations inwhich some or all REs in one or more of the SC-FDMA symbols may bemuted. As generally referred to herein, shortened PUSCH, shortenedPUCCH, PUSCH shortening, PUCCH shortening, SC-FDMA symbol level REpuncturing, SC-FDMA symbol level RE rate-matching, SC-FDMA symbol levelRE muting, shortened subframe, and/or subframe shortening may beinterchangeably used.

For the UL resource in which RE muting may be used, the WTRU behaviormay include at least one of the following: (1) the WTRU may allocatezero transmission power at the UL resource where RE muting is used; (2)the WTRU may consider the muted RE as an unused RE for the ULtransmission; and/or (3) the WTRU may perform the same behavior for themuted RE as the behavior associated with other UL resource not allocatedfor the WTRU, among others.

For a UL resource in which RE muting is used, the eNB behavior mayinclude at least one of the following: (1) the eNB may preclude the ULresource, in which RE muting is used, in its demodulation procedure (forinstance, modulation symbol detection may not be performed for the mutedRE); and/or (2) the eNB may preclude the coded bits from the muted REafter the demodulation procedure in its channel decoding procedure.

Representative PUSCH RE Muting

In certain representative embodiments, the RE muting (e.g., the REpuncturing and/or the RE rate-matching) may be used for the PUSCH, if aPUSCH RE is to collide with a DL channel and/or a RS.

FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of a DL PRB pair (and/orstructure) with normal CP and FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating anexample UL PRB pair (and/or structure) with normal CP.

Referring to FIGS. 6A and 6B, the DL PRB structure 600 and the UL PRBstructure 650 with normal CP are shown. The DL PRB structure 600 mayinclude a PRB having a PDCCH region and a PDSCH region. In the PDCCHregion, REs may include a PDCCH 610 (e.g., control information) and/orDL Cell-Specific RSs (CRSs) 630, among others. In the PDSCH region, theREs may include a PDSCH 620, the DL CRSs 630 and/or DL DM-RSs 640, amongothers. The DL PRB structure 600 may include a DL PRB pair, which mayinclude a plurality of subcarriers (e.g., 12 subcarriers). The DL PRBstructure 600 may include a plurality of symbols 605-1, 605-2, 605,3,605-4, 605-6 and 605-7 (e.g. 7 symbols) for each of the slots 0 and 1.The UL PRB structure 650 may include a first timeslot (e.g., slot 0) 660and a second timeslot (e.g., slot 1) 670. Slot 0 (e.g., the first slot660) and/or slot 1 (e.g., the second slot 670) of the UL PRB structure650 may include a PUSCH 680 and/or UL DM-RSs 690. The UL PRB structure650 may be a UL PRB pair, which may include a plurality of subcarriers(e.g., 12 subcarriers). The UL PRB structure 650 may include a pluralityof symbols 655-1, 655-2, 655-3, 655-4, 655-5, 655-6 and 655-7 (e.g. 7symbols) for each of the slots 0 and 1.

Although FIGS. 6A and 6B illustrate a particular set of PRBpairs/structures, it is contemplated that other PRB structures may beused in representative embodiments. For example, it is contemplated thatthe number of symbols, the type of CP (e.g., extended CP) and thelocations of the various REs, among others, may be modified/varied whilestill allowing for RE or symbol muting in either the UL or DL to reduceor eliminate interference from overlapping signals.

In certain representative embodiments, a WTRU 102 may perform RE mutingin a subframe which may be configured by one or more higher layers(e.g., by the eNB 160 to be an FDR subframe). The WTRU 102 may performRE muting in a subframe based on the relative priorities of the ULsignals to be transmitted and the DL signals, which may be received inthe subframe. In certain representative embodiments, a prioritizationmay be predefined and/or pre-configured.

In certain representative embodiments, RE muting may be used to mute thePUSCH 680 in RE locations and/or in symbols associated with theprioritized DL channel or channels and/or the prioritized RS or RSs of aparticular subframe. The associated DCI (e.g., for granting ULresources) may indicate to use RE muting. The DCI may include one ormore bits to indicate the use of PUSCH RE muting for the one or moreprioritized DL symbols, channels and/or RSs. The WTRU 102 may beprovided an indication (e.g., explicitly indicated) that one or moreparticular DL symbols, channels and/or RSs may be of a higher prioritythan the UL transmission (e.g., any UL transmission) (for example, asimultaneous or an overlapping UL transmission). Such an indication maybe provided in the DCI granting the assignment (e.g., the DCI grantingthe UL assignment and/or resources).

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may be configuredwith a set of subframes for which UL transmissions may be of a higherpriority than the DL transmissions and/or another set of subframes forwhich the DL transmissions may be of a higher priority than the ULtransmissions. In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 mayindicate, for example in a scheduling request, the priority level of itsUL transmissions.

In certain representative embodiments, the priority level of a channel(e.g., one, channel, certain channels or each channel) may be determinedbased on a channel index. The channel index may be preconfigured,dynamically configured and/or configured via higher layer signaling. Forexample, a PDCCH channel with a lower index than a PUSCH channel mayhave priority and may lead to RE muting (and/or symbol muting) of thePUSCH 680 for overlapping or simultaneous transmissions.

Representative PUSCH RE Muting for PDCCH

In certain representative embodiments, a PUSCH RE may collide with thePDCCH region and the PDCCH region may have a higher priority. Based onthe relative priority, the PUSCH REs that may collide with a PDCCHregion may be muted. As an example, one or more of following may apply.

The number of OFDM symbol of the PDCCH region for the PUSCH RE muting inthe subframe may be dynamically configured, predefined and/or configuredby a higher layer. The number of OFDM symbol used for PUSCH RE mutingmay be independent of the number of OFDM symbol indicated by the PCFTCHin the subframe. The WTRU 102 may transmit the PUSCH 680 with RE mutingof the first N PUSCH-RE-Muting SC-FDMA symbols, where the NPUSCH-RE-Muting SC-FDMA symbols may be dynamically configured,predefined and/or configured by a higher layer (e.g., above the physicallayer). The WTRU 102 may monitor the PDCCH 610 of the PDCCH region,which may be indicated by the PCFICH in the subframe. The startingSC-FDMA symbol (e.g., the PUSCH starting symbol) for the PUSCHtransmission may be predefined or configured by a higher layer.

The number of OFDM symbols of the PDCCH region for the PUSCH RE mutingin a subframe may be indicated by the PCFICH in the subframe. Thestarting point of the PUSCH transmission may be indicated by the PCFICHin a subframe (e.g., for each subframe).

FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a representative UL PRB structure 750that may overlap with a PDCCH region of a DL PRB structure.

Referring to FIG. 7 , the UL PRB structure 750 may be muted (e.g., PUSCHRE muted, for example by PUSCH shortening when a PUSCH starting symbol760 is used or applied to start the PUSCH 680 of the UL PRB structure750. For example, on condition that the PUSCH 680 and the PDCCH regionof the DL PRB structure (not shown) overlap, the UL PRB structure 750may be shortened by muting the PUSCH region 755. The PUSCH region 680may include PUSCH REs and/or one or more UL DM-RSs 690, for example. Thenumber of OFDM symbol to be muted in the PUSCH region 755 (e.g., may bethe same number or a different number of symbols as the symbols of thePDCCH region that overlap with the subframe) and may be defined usingthe PUSCH starting symbol 760. The PUSCH starting symbol 760 mayindicate the starting SC-FDMA symbol. The PUSCH starting symbol 760 maybe predefined, configured by a higher layer, and/or indicated by thePCFICH in a subframe (e.g., each subframe).

The number of OFDM symbol of the PDCCH region for the PUSCH RE muting ina subframe may be defined as a shortened PUSCH format. For example, aPUSCH 680 with a configurable PUSCH starting symbol 760 may be definedas a shortened PUSCH format.

The PUSCH RE muting for (e.g., reducing or eliminating interference in)the PDCCH region may be used, if (e.g., responsive to or when) a PUSCHtransmission power is higher than a threshold. For example, the PUSCH REmuting for (e.g., reducing or eliminating interference in) the PDCCHregion may not be used, if the PUSCH transmission power is lower than athreshold. In certain representative embodiments, the PUSCH RE mutingfor the PDCCH region may be used, if a PUSCH transmission has any oneof: a transmission power, a Transmission Block Size (TBS), a Modulationand Coding Scheme (MCS) and/or a redundancy version that exceeds athreshold (e.g., is greater than or less than a correspondingthreshold). The power threshold, the TBS threshold, the MCS thresholdand/or the redundancy version threshold may be dynamically configured,predefined and/or configured by a higher layer.

Representative PUSCH RE muting for EPDCCH

In certain representative embodiments, a PUSCH RE may collide with anEPDCCH and, for example, the EPDCCH may have a higher priority. To notinterfere with the EPDCCH, the PUSCH RE that may collide with the EPDCCHmay be muted. As an example, one or more of following may apply.

For an EPDCCH transmitted in a subset of a PRB in a subframe in thePDSCH region, the PUSCH REs (e.g., some or all PUSCH REs) within a PRBpair that may collide with the EPDCCH PRB-pair may be muted.

The WTRU 102 may transmit the PUSCH 680 from a first SC-FDMA symbol(e.g., for a subframe having a non-FDRR) and may transmit the PUSCH 680from the starting SC-FDMA symbol (e.g., as the PUSCH starting symbol 760for a subframe having a FDRR). The type of subframe (e.g., whether anFDRR or a non-FDRR) may be predefined, configured by a higher layer,and/or the PCFICH may indicate the type of subframe, such as FDRR or nonFDRR). For example, if a subframe is used as an FDRR, the WTRU 102 mayselectively transmit the PUSCH 680 from the starting SC-FDMA symbol(e.g., the PUSCH starting symbol) 760 and, if a subframe is used as anon-FDRR, the WTRU 102 may selectively transmit the PUSCH 680 from thefirst SC-FDMA symbol in the subframe (which may selectively provide ashortened subframe for transmission).

In certain representative embodiments, a PUSCH RE 860, which may collidewith a DL DM-RS of the EPDCCH, may be muted, and a PUSCH RE, which maycollide with the EPDCCH RE (e.g., but not a DL DM-RS RE), may not bemuted.

FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating another representative UL PRB structure850 having a PUSCH 680 showing PUSCH RE muting (e.g., applied when thePUSCH RE or PUSCH REs 860 are to collide with an EPDCCH (no shown) suchas the DL DM-RS REs) (e.g., associated with antenna port 107 to 114)used for EPDCCH demodulation.

Referring to FIG. 8 , the UL PRB structure 850 may include a firsttimeslot (e.g., slot 0) and a second timeslot (e.g., slot 1). Slot 0and/or slot 1 of the UL PRB structure 850 may include the PUSCH 680and/or the UL DM-RSs 690. The UL PRB structure 850 may be a UL PRB pair,which may include a plurality of subcarriers (e.g., 12 subcarriers). TheUL PRB structure 850 may include a plurality of symbols 655-1, 655-2,655-3, 655-4, 655-5, 655-6 and 655-7 (e.g. 7 symbols) for each of theslots 0 and 1. The UL DM-RS 690 may be included in one or more symbols(e.g., the fourth symbol 655-4 in each slot (e.g., slot 0 or 1).

The PUSCH RE or PUSCH REs 860 that may collide with the DL DM-RS of theEPDCCH and/or the PUSCH RE or PUSCH REs 860 located in the same SC-FDMAsymbol or symbols 655-6 and 655-7 (e.g., in the vicinity and/or adjacentto the PUSCH RE or PUSCH REs 860 that may collide with the DM-RS of theEPDCCH) may be muted.

For example, certain PUSCH REs 860 may be muted. The PUSCH REs 860 mayinclude individual PUSCH REs 860 and/or PUSCH RE groups (such as PUSCHRE groups 861, 863 and 865) that may be muted. The REs 860 and/or REgroups 861, 863 and/or 865 may be associated with a particular symbol orparticular symbols (e.g., symbols 655-6 and/or 655-7). In certainrepresentative embodiments, the PUSCH REs 860 may be associated withsymbols at the end of one or more slots (e.g., slot 0 and/or slot 1) 660and 670 such as the last N symbols of those slots)). As another example,the PUSCH REs 860 may include certain subcarriers (e.g., only certainsubcarriers), for example, at the beginning portion, middle portionand/or end portion of a PRB for the particular symbol or symbols. If thePUSCH PRB-pair is to collide with an EPDCCH PRB-pair, the PUSCH REmuting may be used for (e.g., only for) the RE that may collide with theDL DM-RS REs for the EPDCCH (e.g., only for particular REs, for examplehaving a high priority that is above a threshold).

Although certain PUSCH REs are illustrated as muted, it is contemplatedthat any PUSCH RE may be muted to reduce interference with a collidingsignal (e.g., in the DL and/or from other signals). For example, one REor a group of REs may be muted to reduce or eliminate interference froma collision with a higher priority signal (e.g., from the oppositedirection and/or from a neighboring device).

FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a further representative UL PRBstructure 950 showing PUSCH symbol muting (e.g., of all PUSCH REsassociated with one or more symbols 655-6 and 655-7 applied when thesymbols 655-6 and 655-7 are to collide with the EPDCCH) (e.g., DL DM-RSREs of a PRB pair).

Referring to FIG. 9 , the UL PRB structure 950 may include a firsttimeslot (e.g., slot 0) and a second timeslot (e.g., slot 1). Slot 0and/or slot 1 of the UL PRB structure 950 may include the PUSCH 680and/or the UL DM-RSs 690. The UL PRB structure 950 may be a UL PRB pair,which may include a plurality of subcarriers (e.g., 12 subcarriers). TheUL PRB structure 950 may include a plurality of symbols 655-1, 655-2,655-3, 655-4, 655-5, 655-6 and 655-7 (e.g. 7 symbols) for each of theslots 0 and 1. The UL DM-RS 690 may be included in one or more symbols(e.g., the fourth symbol 655-4 in each slot (e.g., slot 0 or 1).

The representative PRB structure 950 shows muting of: (1) the PUSCH REs860 that may collide with the DL DM-RS REs; and (2) the PUSCH REs 860located in the same SC-FDMA symbol or symbols (e.g., symbols 655-6 and655-7) as the PUSCH REs that collided with the DL DM-RS REs. By mutingall PUSCH RE 860 in a particular SC-FDMA symbol or symbols 655-6 and655-7 in which DL DM-RS (e.g., of the opposite direction) may betransmitted, the single carrier property of SC-FDMA may be maintained.The muting of the particular SC-FDMA symbol or symbols 655-6 and 655-7may be for (e.g., only for) the PUSCH PRB-pair that may collide with theEPDCCH PRB-pair.

If a PUSCH 680 is to collide with both the PDSCH DL DM-RSs and theEPDCCH DL DM-RSs, at least one of following may be applied: (1) thePUSCH RE that may collide with the DL DM-RS of the PDSCH 620, may not bemuted and the PUSCH RE 860 may be muted for (e.g., only) the DL DM-RSREs of the EPDCCH; and/or (2) the PUSCH RE 860 may be muted for one orboth of the DM-RS REs of the PDSCH 620 and/or the DM-RS REs of theEPDCCH.

In certain representative embodiments, PUSCH RE muting for (e.g.,reducing or eliminating interference in) the EPDCCH may be applied, ifthe WTRU 102 monitors (e.g., detects) the EPDCCH in the subframe. Incertain representative embodiments, PUSCH RE muting for the EPDCCH maybe applied for (e.g., only for) an EPDCCH PRB-pair containing orincluding an EPDCCH WTRU-specific search space and/or an EPDCCH commonsearch space. In certain representative embodiments, PUSCH RE muting forthe EPDCCH may be used for (e.g., only for) an EPDCCH

PRB-pair containing or including an EPDCCH common search space and thePUSCH RE that may collide with the EPDCCH WTRU-specific search space maynot be muted.

Representative UL DM-RS Pattern According to PUSCH RE Muting

An UL DM-RS pattern may be changed when PUSCH RE muting is used (e.g.,applied) due to the collision with a DL channel or a RS. The RS patternmay be interchangeably associated with and refer to a RS structure, a RSlocation, and/or a RS time/frequency location. For example, one or moreof the following may apply.

The UL DM-RS structure may be changed according to the collision withand/or potential collision with the DL channel and/or the DL channelcolliding with the PUSCH 680. For instance, the UL DM-RS structure 1(e.g., a Release-8 (Rel-8) DM-RS structure) may be used, if the WTRU 102transmits a PUSCH 680 without any collision with a higher priority DLchannel. If the WTRU 102 is to transmit a PUSCH 680 that is to collidewith the PDCCH 610 (when it is determined or known that the PDCCH 610and/or certain PDCCH REs have a higher priority than the PUSCH 680and/or certain PUSCH REs), the WTRU 102 may apply or use a UL DM-RSstructure 2. If the WTRU 102 is to transmit a PUSCH 680 that is tocollide with the EPDCCH when it is determined or known that the EPDCCHDM-RS (or REs of the EPDCCH) has a higher priority than the PUSCH 680(or the REs of the PUSCH 680), the WTRU 102 may transmit the PUSCH 680using a UL DM-RS structure 3, which may be different from the UL DM-RSstructure 1 and/or the UL DM-RS structure 2. For the UL DM-RSstructures, one or more of following may apply: (1) the UL DM-RSstructure, which may be used or applied when the PUSCH 680 is not tocollide with or does not collide with a higher priority DL channel or RSmay be the Rel-8 UL DM-RS structure as shown in FIG. 8 ; (2) the ULDM-RS structures, which may be used or applied when the PUSCH 680 is tocollide with a higher priority DL channel or RS may have different timelocations of the UL DM-RS symbols. In certain representativeembodiments, the UL DM-RS structure, which may be used or applied whenthe PUSCH 680 is to collide with a higher priority DL channel or RS mayhave a lesser number of UL DM-RS symbols. In certain representativeembodiments, the UL DM-RS structure may be changed according to thesubframe type (e.g., a SINTF subframe and/or a NINTF subframe.) Forinstance, the UL DM-RS structure 1 may be used in the SINTF subframeand/or the UL DM-RS structure 2 may be used in the NINTF subframe.

Although UL DM-RS structures 1, 2 and/or 3 are disclosed herein, (forexample, DM-RS structure 1 may be shown in FIG. 8 , DM-RS structure 2may be shown in FIG. 11 , and DM-RS structure 3 may be shown in FIG. 16, other UL DM RS structures are possible including different DM-RSlocations, for example, which may be applied for PUSCH transmissions.

FIG. 10 is a diagram of an additional representative UL PRB structure1050 showing an example of a UL DM-RS time location change and FIG. 11is a diagram of still another representative UL PRB structure showing areduced number of (e.g., fewer) UL DM-RS symbols relative to FIG. 10 .

Referring to FIGS. 10 and 11 , a PDCCH region of a DL transmission maycollide with (e.g., overlap) multiple symbols of the PUSCH 680 of the UL(e.g., the first two or three symbols of the PUSCH 680 of the UL). Oneor more of the UL DM-RS structures (e.g., UL DM-RS structures 1 2,and/or 3) may be defined and/or configured and one of these UL DM-RSstructures may be selected for PUSCH transmission according to the DLchannel and/or RS that is to collide with the PUSCH 680.

For example, the UL DM-RS structure may be changed or modified (e.g.,the symbol or symbols 655-4 generally associated with the UL DM-RS 690may be time shifted, for example as shown in FIG. 10 and/orchanged/reduced in number, for example as shown in FIG. 11 ) when thePUSCH 680 (and/or the UL DM-RS 690 of the PUSCH 680) is to collide witha higher priority DL channel or RS and/or, when a specific condition issatisfied).

In certain representative embodiments, the UL DM-RS 690 may be timeshifted, for example, from the fourth symbol 655-4 to the sixth symbol655-6 for slot 0 and may be maintained without time shifting in thefourth symbol 655-4 for slot 1.

The condition to be satisfied may include at least one of following: (1)a PUSCH transmit power may exceed a threshold (e.g., be lower or higherthan a threshold); and/or (2) an eNB absolute transmission power may beless than a threshold, among others.

In other representative embodiments, the UL DM-RS 690 may be eliminatedin slot 0 and time shifted from the fourth symbol 655-4 to the secondsymbol 655-2 for slot 1

Although the time shifting and adjustment in the number of symbols forUL DM-RS is described using particular symbols, it is contemplated thatany time-shifting and any number of UL DM-RM symbols may be used as longas interference to high priority signals is reduced and/or eliminated.

Although two UL DM-RSs are illustrated in FIG. 10 to be time shifted, itis contemplated that one, some or all of the UL DM-RSs may be timeshifted (e.g., to avoid collision with higher priority DL signaling).

Although UL DM-RSs are illustrated in FIG. 11 to be reduced in number,it is contemplated that any UL DM-RS and/or group of UL DM-RSs may bereduced, increased or changed in number (e.g., to avoid collision withhigher priority DL signaling).

Representative PUSCH RE Muting for CRS

A PUSCH RE may collide (e.g., overlap) with a CRS (e.g., a DL CRS 630)and, for example the DL CRS 630 may have a higher priority. To avoidinterference for the DL CRS 630, the PUSCH RE that may collide with theDL CRS 630 may be muted. For example, one or more of the following mayapply.

The PUSCH RE that may collide with the DL CRS 630 may be muted. Themuted PUSCH RE location may be different according to the number of CRSport and/or the v-shift value of the DL CRS 630.

FIG. 12 is diagram illustrating a still further representative UL PRBstructure 1250 showing PUSCH RE muting (e.g., applied for 4Tx CRS) andFIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a still additional representative ULPRB structure 1350 showing PUSCH symbol muting (e.g., applied for 4TxCRS RE locations (e.g., when v-shift=0 is used)).

In certain representative embodiments, the DL CRS configurationincluding the number of CRS port and/or v-shift value for the PUSCH REmuting may be: (1) signaled from a serving cell or a neighbor cell;and/or (2) configured via higher layer signaling (e.g., above thephysical layer).

Referring to FIGS. 12 and 13 , the UL PRB structures 1250 and 1350 mayeach include a first timeslot (e.g., slot 0) and a second timeslot(e.g., slot 1). Slot 0 and/or slot 1 of the UL PRB structures 1250 and1350 may each include a PUSCH 680 and/or the UL DM-RSs 690. The UL PRBstructure 1250 and 1350 may each be a UL PRB pair, which may eachinclude a plurality of subcarriers (e.g., 12 subcarriers). The UL PRBstructure 1250 and 1350 may include a plurality of symbols 655-1, 655-2,655-3, 655-4, 655-5, 655-6 and 655-7 (e.g. 7 symbols) for each of theslots 0 and 1. The UL DM-RS 690 may be included in one or more symbols(e.g., the fourth symbol 655-4 in each slot (e.g., slot 0 or 1).

The representative UL PRB structure 1250 shows muting of: (1) the PUSCHREs 860 that may collide with DL DM-RS REs. The representative UL PRBstructure 1350 shows muting of: (1) the PUSCH REs 860 that may collidewith the DL DM-RS REs and the PUSCH REs 860 located in the same SC-FDMAsymbol (e.g., symbols 655-1, 655-2, and/or 655-5) as the PUSCH REs 860that collided with the DL DM-RS REs. As shown in FIG. 13 , by muting allPUSCH RE 860 in a particular SC-FDMA symbol or symbols 655-1, 655-2 and655-5 overlapping with DL DM-RS transmitted in the opposite direction,the single carrier property of SC-FDMA may be maintained. ParticularSC-FDMA symbols 655-1, 655-2 and 655-5 may be muted for (e.g., only) aPUSCH PRB-pair that may collide with the EPDCCH PRB-pair.

In certain representative embodiments, the PUSCH REs 860 located in theSC-FDMA symbols (e.g., the SC-FDMA symbols 655-1, 655-2, and 655-5 inslot 0 and/or slot 1 which may collide with the OFDM symbol containingor including the DL CRS 630 may be muted.

If a SC-FDMA symbol is to collide with an OFDM symbol containing orincluding a DL CRS 630 (e.g., in the 1st, 2nd, and/or 5th OFDM symbol ina slot 0 and/or slot 1), the PUSCH REs 860 (e.g., the PUSCH REs 860 thatmay collide with the DL CRS 630, for example as illustrated, in FIG. 12, and/or all PUSCH REs 860 associated with the SC-FDMA symbols (e.g.,the SC-FDMA symbols 655-1, 655-2, and 655-5 in each slot) that maycollide with the DL CRS 630, for example as illustrated in FIG. 13 maybe muted. For example, a SC-FDMA symbol or symbols (e.g., the SC-FDMAsymbols 655-1, 655-2, or 655-5 in one or more slots that may collidewith the DL CRS 630 (e.g., overlap with the OFDM symbol containing orincluding the DL CRS 630) may be muted. The number of the SC-FDMAsymbols that may collide with the OFDM symbol containing or includingthe DL CRS 630 may be different (e.g., according to the number of CRSport). For example, if one or two CRS ports arc used or applied, thePUSCH REs in 4 SC-FDMA symbols may be muted (not shown). If four CRSports are used or applied, the PUSCH REs in 6 SC-FDMA symbols may bemuted. In FIG. 12 , the muting may be specific to particular REs, whilein FIG. 13 , the muting may be the REs (e.g., each of the REs) in theSC-FDMA symbols (e.g., symbols 655-1, 655-2 and/or 655-5) associatedwith a collision of the DL CRSs 630.

The PUSCH RE muting for the DL CRS 630 may be used or applied, if thePUSCH transmission power is higher than a threshold. In certainrepresentative embodiments, the PUSCH RE muting for the DL CRS 630 maybe used or applied, if the CRS power level is lower than a threshold.Each subset of subframes used for measurement reporting may beconfigured with a different type of PUSCH RE muting for the DL CRS 630(for example, PUSCH RE muting, PUSCH symbol muting and/or no muting).The number of CRS ports may be independent (for example according towhether a resource is a FDRR or a non-FDRR). For example, the maximumnumber of CRS port in a FDRR may be two and the maximum number of CRSport in a non-FDRR may be four. In another example, two CRS ports may beused in a FDRR (and/or the FDR subframe) and four CRS ports may be usedin a non-FDRR (and/or the non-FDR subframe).

Representative PUSCH RE Muting for Sync Channel and/or PBCH

A PUSCH RE may collide with one or more DL synchronization channels(e.g., a PSS and/or a SSS) and/or the PBCH. To avoid interference forthe synchronization channels and/or the PBCH, the PUSCH RE that maycollide with the PSS/SSS and/or the PBCH may be muted. For example, oneor more of the following may apply: (1) the PUSCH RE that may collidewith the synchronization channel may be muted. In a subframe containingor including the PSS/SSS and without the PBCH (e.g., subframe 5), thePUSCH RE that may collide with the PSS/SSS may be muted and the same ULDM-RS pattern may be used for the PUSCH transmission.

FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating yet another representative UL PRBstructure 1450 showing PUSCH symbol muting.

Referring to FIG. 14 , the UL PRB structure 1450 may include a firsttimeslot (e.g., slot 0) and a second timeslot (e.g., slot 1). Slot 0and/or slot 1 of the UL PRB structure 1450 may include the PUSCH 680and/or the UL DM-RSs 690. The UL PRB structure 1450 may be a UL PRBpair, which may include a plurality of subcarriers (e.g., 12subcarriers). The UL PRB structure 1450 may include a plurality ofsymbols 655-1, 655-2, 655-3, 655-4, 655-5, 655-6 and 655-7 (e.g. 7symbols) for each of the slots 0 and 1. The UL DM-RS 690 may be includedin one or more symbols (e.g., the fourth symbol 655-4 in each slot(e.g., slot 0 or 1).

The PUSCH RE muting for the PSS/SSS may be defined as PUSCH symbolmuting. The PUSCH RE muting for the PSS/SSS may be applied (e.g., onlyused) for the center 6 RBs. If a PUSCH transmission includes a PRB-pairwhich is not in (e.g., within) the center 6 RBs, the PRB-pair may notinclude the PUSCH muting for the PSS/SSS. The PUSCH RE muting for thePSS/SSS may be applied (e.g., used) for the PRB-pairs (e.g., allPRB-pairs) granted for PUSCH transmission, if one or more of thePRB-pairs granted for the PUSCH transmission located in (e.g., within)the center 6 RBs contain or include the PSS/SSS. For instance, if theWTRU 102 is scheduled to transmit the PUSCH 680 and none of the RBsgranted for the PUSCH transmission are to collide with the PSS/SSS, theWTRU 102 may transmit the PUSCH 680 without PUSCH RE muting for thePSS/SSS. In certain representative embodiment, if the WTRU 102 isscheduled to transmit the PUSCH 680 and one or more of the RBs grantedfor the PUSCH transmission are to collide with the PSS/SSS, the WTRU 102may transmit the PUSCH 680 with muted PUSCH REs 860 for (e.g., reducingand/or eliminating interference with) the PSS/SSS for the granted RBs(e.g., all of the RBs granted).

FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a yet further representative UL PRBstructure 1550 showing PUSCH symbol muting with fewer DM-RS symbolsrelative to FIG. 16 .

Referring to FIG. 15 , the UL PRB structure 1550 may include a firsttimeslot (e.g., slot 0) and a second timeslot (e.g., slot 1). Slot 0and/or slot 1 of the UL PRB structure 1550 may include the PUSCH 680and/or the UL DM-RSs 690. The UL PRB structure 1550 may be a UL PRBpair, which may include a plurality of subcarriers (e.g., 12subcarriers). The UL PRB structure 1550 may include a plurality ofsymbols 655-1, 655-2, 655-3, 655-4, 655-5, 655-6 and 655-7 (e.g. 7symbols) for each of the slots 0 and 1. The UL DM-RS 690 may be includedin one or more symbols (e.g., the fourth symbol 655-4) in slot 0 and maynot be included in one or more symbols (e.g., the fourth symbol 655-4)in slot 1, which may reduce the number of symbols used for UL DM-RS fora PRB pair relative to, for example, FIG. 16 .

For example, the UL DM-RS 690 may generally be located in the fourthsymbol 655-4 in slots 0 and 1. In other representative embodiments, theUL DM-RS 690 may be located in (e.g., only located in) one slot 0 or 1(e.g., the fourth symbol 655-4 of slot 0 or slot 1). It is contemplatethat the symbol associated with UL DM-RS 690 may be any symbol that doesnot overlap with a high priority signal from another direction (e.g.,the DL direction).

In FIG. 15 , the PRB structure 1550 may have PUSCH RE muting applied tomitigate collisions with the PSS/SSS and/or the PBCH. The PUSCH RE 860that may collide with the PSS/SSS and/or the PBCH may be muted. In asubframe containing or including the PSS/SSS with the PBCH (e.g.,subframe 0), the PUSCH RE 860 (e.g., that are associated with symbols655-6, 655-7 of slot 0 and symbols 655-1-655-2, 655-3 and 655-4 ofslot 1) that may collide with the PSS/SSS and/or the PBCH may be mutedand the UL DM-RS pattern may be different from the UL DM-RS pattern usedfor the subframe containing or including the PSS/SSS without the PBCH(e.g., the Rel-8 UL DM-RS pattern). If a PRB-pair contains or includesboth the PSS/SSS and the PBCH, fewer UL DM-RS symbols as compared withRcl-8 UL DM-RS may be applied or used in the PRB-pair. For example, ifthe PRB-pair contains or includes both the PSS/SSS and the PBCH, one ULDM-RS symbol may be applied in the PRB-pair and the UL DM-RS symbol maybe located in one of the SC-FDMA symbols (e.g., symbol 655-4), whichdoes not collide with the PSS/SSS and the PBCH.

FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a yet additional representative UL PRBstructure 1650 showing PUSCH symbol muting with a DM-RS symbol timelocation change (e.g., applied when the PUSCH symbol is to collide withthe PSS/SSS and/or the PBCH such that the time location of the DM-RSsymbol is modified or changed).

For example, the UL DM-RS 690 may generally be located in the fourthsymbol 655-4 in slots 0 and 1. In other representative embodiments, theUL DM-RS 690 may be located in the fourth symbol 655-4 of slot 0 and ata different symbol (e.g., the fifth symbol 655-5 of slot 1). It iscontemplate that the symbol associated with UL DM-RS 690 may be in anyslot and in any number of symbols that does not overlap with a highpriority signal from another direction (e.g., the DL direction).

Referring to FIG. 16 , the UL PRB structure 1650 may include PUSCHmuting similar to or identical to that of FIG. 15 and may include afirst timeslot (e.g., slot 0) and a second timeslot (e.g., slot 1). Slot0 and/or slot 1 of the UL PRB structure 1650 may include the PUSCH 680and/or the UL DM-RSs 690. The UL PRB structure 1650 may be a UL PRBpair, which may include a plurality of subcarriers (e.g., 12subcarriers). The UL PRB structure 1650 may include a plurality ofsymbols 655-1, 655-2, 655-3, 655-4, 655-5, 655-6 and 655-7 (e.g. 7symbols) for each of the slots 0 and 1. The UL DM-RS 690 may be includedin one or more symbols (e.g., the fourth symbol 655-4 in a first one ofthe slots (e.g., slot 0 or 1) and in one or more symbols (e.g., thefifth symbol 655-5 in a second one of the slots (e.g., slot 0 or 1).

If a PRB-pair contains or includes both the PSS/SSS and the PBCH, thesame number of DM-RS symbols, as the Rel-8 UL DM-RS, may be used orapplied with a time location change as illustrated in FIG. 16 . In oneexample, the 2nd DM-RS symbol location may be changed. In anotherexample, the location of both DM-RS symbols may be changed.

If the PUSCH 680 that may collide with the PSS/SSS and the PBCH containsor includes a UCI (e.g., including HARQ_ACK), the PUSCH 680 that maycollide may not be transmitted in the subframe.

Representative PUSCH RE Muting for PDSCH

In certain representative embodiments, a PUSCH RE may collide with thePDSCH 620 and the DL DM-RS for the PDSCH 620 may have a higher prioritythan the PUSCH RE. The PUSCH RE may be muted to avoid interference. Forexample, one or more of following may apply: (1) the PUSCH RE that maycollide with the DL DM-RS for the PDSCH demodulation may be muted asshown in FIGS. 8 and 9 ; (2) the PUSCH RE that may collide with the DLDM-RS for a scheduled PDSCH 620 may be muted; and/or (3) if the PUSCH680 contains or includes a UCI (e.g., including HARQ ACK), the PUSCH REmay not be muted, although the PUSCH RE is to collide with the PDSCHDM-RS.

In certain representative embodiments, a PUSCH RE may collide with thePDSCH 620 and the PDSCH 620 containing or including the SIB or paginginformation may have a higher priority than the PUSCH RE. The PUSCH REmay be muted to avoid interference. For example, the following mayapply: (1) the PUSCH RE may be muted, if the PUSCH RE is to collide witha PDSCH 620 containing or including the SIB or paging information. Forinstance, a PUSCH PRB-pair that may collide with the PDSCH PRB-paircontaining or including the SIB or the paging information may be muted.

Representative PUSCH RE Muting for CSI-RS

In certain representative embodiments, the PUSCH RE that may collidewith a CSI-RS (or equivalently a CSI-IM) may be muted. If the WTRU 102transmits the PUSCH 680 and the WTRU 102 receives or needs to receivethe CSI-RS, the PUSCH RE 860 that may collide with the CSI-RS may bemuted.

In certain representative embodiments, a zero-power CSI-RS (ZP-CSI-RS)may be applied or used for the PUSCH transmission. For example, one ormore of following may apply: (1) the ZP-CSI-RS may be configuredindependently for the PDSCH 620 and/or the PUSCH 680; (2) the WTRU 102may measure the DL interference from a ZP-CSI-RS location for the PUSCH680 and/or an eNB 160 may measure the UL interference from the ZP-CSI-RSlocation for the PDSCH 620; (3) the WTRU 102 may report CSI based on theinterference measurement from one or both of the ZP-CSI-RS for the PUSCH680 and/or the ZP-CSI-RS for the PDSCH 620.

Representative PUSCH Prioritization can Depend on Included InformationType

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may adjust aprioritization of the PUSCH 680 (e.g., compared to or relative tocertain DL channels and/or signals) as a function of a MAC CE (e.g.,that may be included in the transmission). The WTRU 102 may follow oneor more of the prioritization rules herein to determine theprioritization of the PUSCH 680 relative to certain DL channels andsignals.

For the prioritization of the Random Access Channel (RACH) related MACCE and UL data, the WTRU 102 may consider or may set the PUSCH 680containing or including the C-RNTI MAC CE and/or the UL CCCH data, whichmay be transmitted as part of a random access procedure, to beprioritized higher than other signals or channels. The WTRU 102 mayconsider or set the PUSCH priority to be higher compared to the DLchannels and signals, for example: (i) the PUSCH 680 may be a higherpriority than the PDSCH 620, except for possibly when the PDSCH 620 iscarrying cell related information, for example, paging informationand/or the SIBs; and/or (ii) the PUSCH 680 may be a higher priority thanthe PDCCH 610, except for possibly the PDCCH 610 in the CS S, which maycarry DCI scrambled with a common RNTI, for example SI-RNTI and/orP-RNTI, among others.

For the prioritization of scheduling related CEs, the WTRU 102 mayconsider or set the PUSCH 680 containing or including the CEs, whichprovide information to the network for proper UL scheduling, to beprioritized higher than other signals or channels. For example, theBuffer Status Report (BSR), the Power Headroom Report (PHR), and/or theextended BSR may be considered to be scheduling related CEs. For thePUSCH 680, which contains or includes these CEs, the WTRU 102 maydetermine the PUSCH priority to be the following compared to the DLchannels: (i) the PUSCH 680 may be a higher priority than the PDSCH 620,except for possibly the PDSCH 620, which may be addressed to multipleWTRUs 102 (for example, the PDSCH 620 may contain or include the paginginformation or the SIBs); and/or (ii) the PUSCH 680 may be a higherpriority than the PDCCH 610 except for possibly the PDCCH 610 in theCSS, which may carry DCI scrambled with a common RNTI, for example theSI-RNTI, the P-RNTI, and/or the RA-RNTI, among others.

For the prioritization of data, the WTRU 102 may consider or set thePUSCH 680 for data to be prioritized higher than other signals orchannels. For example, a PUSCH transmission that is based onsemi-persistent scheduling (SPS) grants may be prioritized higher than aPUSCH transmission based on and/or set by dynamic grants. The PUSCH 680,which includes data based on the SPS, may be a higher priority than thePDSCH 620 and its associated PDCCH 610 carrying the dynamic grant. Incertain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may consider or set thedynamic grant based PUSCH 680 to be of a higher priority than the SPSbased grants, and the WTRU 102 may consider or may set the PUSCH 680 tobe of a higher priority than the PDSCH 620 carrying SPS data.

For the prioritization of the PUSCH 680 compared to (e.g., relative tothe PBCH, the PSS/SSS and/or the DL CRS 630), the WTRU 102 may notconsider or set the PUSCH 680 to a higher priority compared to specificchannels and/or signals such as the PBCH, the PSS/SSS, and/or the DL CRS630, regardless of the MAC CE, which are included in the PUSCH 680.

One or more channels, which have lower priority based on the above rulesand/or have resource collisions, may perform rate matching, puncturing,and/or RE muting based on various representative embodiment describedherein for the PUSCH 680, for the PDSCH 620 and/or for the PDCCH 610.

The WTRU 102 may apply the prioritization of the PUSCH 680 based oninformation content (e.g., implicitly provided to the WTRU 102 and/orexplicitly signaled by the eNB 160 or another node). The WTRU 102 mayapply the prioritization to one channel, certain channels, or allchannels commonly and/or may provide different prioritizations todifferent channels (e.g., logical channels or logical channel groups).The WTRU 102 may apply different prioritizations based on, for exampleQoS parameters (e.g., of a logical channel or each logical channel).

Representative PUCCH RE Muting

FIG. 17A is a diagram illustrating a representative PUCCH PRB pair 1700without subframe shortening and FIG. 17B is a diagram illustratinganother representative PUCCH PRB pair 1750 with subframe shortening(e.g., PUCCH shortening).

Referring to FIGS. 17A and 17B, the PUCCH PRB pairs 1700 and 1750 mayinclude ACK/NACK, CQI (not shown) and/or RS signaling. The UL PUCCH PRBpairs 1700 and 1750 may include a plurality of subcarriers (e.g., 12subcarriers) (e.g., in frequency) and a plurality of symbols 1710-1,1710-2, 1710-3, 1710-4, 1710-5, 1710-6, and 1710-7 (e.g., in time) foreach of the slot.

FIGS. 17A and 17B illustrate that certain PUCCH REs may be selectivelymuted (e.g., the subframes may be shortened). For example, the PUCCH REs(e.g., in symbols 1710-1 and 1710-2 associated with ACK/NACK signalingmay collide with a PDCCH region (not shown) and may be muted. As anotherexample, one or more of following may apply.

(1) The first one or a plurality of symbols 1710-1 and 1710-2 (e.g., twoPUCCH symbols) may be muted when the PUCCH symbols 1710-1 and 1710-2 areto collide with a PDCCH region. This muting may be defined as orreferred to as PUCCH shortening. The PUCCH shortening may imply that thefirst N PUCCH symbols 1710, 1710-2 . . . 1710-N may be muted. The numberof muted PUCCH symbol may be indicated by the number of OFDM symbol usedfor the PDCCH region. The PCFICH in the subframe may indicate the numberof muted PUCCH symbol in the subframe. The number of muted PUCCH symbolsmay be predefined, as a fixed number. For instance, the first two PUCCHsymbols 1710-1, and 1710-2 may be muted as shown in FIG. 17B whichillustrates a PUCCH PRB-pair with shortening. The number of muted PUCCHsymbols may be configured via higher layer signaling.

(2) A PUCCH format (e.g., a new PUCCH format) may be defined and/orapplied and the new PUCCH format may have muted SC-FDMA symbolscorresponding to locations of the PDCCH region. For the 3GPP LTE PUCCHformats 1, 1a and/or 1b, RS symbols 1710-4 and 1710-5 (e.g., two RSsymbols) may be used for each slot and the RS symbols may be located ator in the 4th and 5th SC-FDMA symbols. For the 3GPP LTE PUCCH format 2,2a, and/or 2b, a RS symbol 1710-1, 1710-2, 1710-3, 1710-4, 1710-5,1710-6, or 1710-7 (e.g., a single or one RS symbol) may be used for aslot (e.g., each slot) and the RS symbol may be located in any SC-FDMAsymbol which may not overlap with the PDCCH region. A PUCCH RE mutingmay be used or applied according to the PUCCH format set or used. Forinstance, the PUCCH RE muting may be used or applied for the PUCCHformats 2, 2a, and/or 2b and the PUCCH RE muting may not be used orapplied for the PUCCH formats 1, 1a, and/or 1b.

Representative UL Channel Dependent Puncturing/Rate-MatchingRepresentative PUCCH RE Muting

RE puncturing and/or RE rate-matching may be used or applied for a DLchannel, for example if an RE of the DL channel is to collide with a ULchannel or a UL RS, which may have a higher priority than the DLchannel. RE muting may employ RE puncturing and/or RE rate-matching.

RE muting may be applied at the OFDM symbol level in which REs (e.g.,some or all REs) in one or more of the OFDM symbols may be muted. Theterms shortened PDSCH, PDSCH shortening, OFDM symbol level REpuncturing, OFDM symbol level RE rate-matching, and OFDM symbol level REmuting may be interchangeably used. For the DL resource in which REmuting may be used or applied, an eNB 160 may perform at least one offollowing: (1) the eNB 160 may allocate zero transmission power at theDL resource where RE muting may be used or applied; (2) the eNB 160 mayconsider the DL resource as the UL resource; and/or (3) the cNB 160 mayperform the same behavior as for Interference Measurement-CSI-RS(IM-CSI-RS), among others.

For the DL resource in which RE muting may be used or applied, the WTRU102 behavior may include at least one of following: (1) the WTRU 102 maypreclude the DL resource in which RE muting may be used or applied inits demodulation procedure (for instance, the modulation symboldetection may not be performed for the muted RE; (2) the WTRU 102 maypreclude the coded bits from the muted RE after the demodulationprocedure in its channel decoding procedure; and/or (3) the WTRU 102 mayperform the same behavior as the IM-CSI-RS for the muted RE due to thecollision with a higher priority UL channel, among others.

Representative PDSCH RE Muting

A PDSCH RE that may collide with a UL channel or an RS having a higherpriority may be muted.

Representative PDSCH RE Muting for PUCCH or PRACH

In certain representative embodiments, a PDSCH RE that may collide withthe PUCCH may be muted. The PUCCH PRB-pairs 1700 and 1750 may be locatedin a band edge. The PDSCH RE muting may be performed by one or more offollowing.

(1) PDSCH PRB level muting for the PUCCH may be used or applied, if thePDSCH PRB is to collide with a PUCCH PRB 1700. For example, the WTRU 102may decode or may need to decode a PDSCH 620 in a subframe and the PDSCH620 may contain or include the PRBs overlapped with a PUCCH PRB. TheWTRU 102 may decode the PRBs, which are not overlapped with the PUCCH.The PDSCH PRB level muting may be either RE puncturing or RErate-matching. In certain representative embodiments, the PDSCH PRBlevel muting for the PUCCH may be used or applied for the PUCCH PRBcontaining or including a specific PUCCH format such as a PUCCH formatused for ACK/NACK, e.g., the 3GPP LTE PUCCH format 1, 1 a, and/or 1b.

(2) PDSCH PRB level muting (e.g., per time slot) may be used, if thePDSCH PRB is to collide with the PUCCH PRB. For example, the WTRU 102may decode or may need to decode the PDSCH 620 in a subframe and thePDSCH 620 may contain or include the PRBs that overlap with a PUCCH,(for example transmitted by the same WTRU 102). The WTRU 102 may decodethe PRBs which are not overlapped with the PUCCH. The WTRUs 102 maydecode a single time slot of the PRB, for which a time slot may not beoverlapping with the PUCCH, but the other time slot of the same PRB maybe overlapping with the PUCCH. The PDSCH PRB level muting may be eitherRE puncturing or RE rate-matching.

(3) PDSCH PRB level muting for the PUCCH may be used or applied with areduced bandwidth. For instance, if a system bandwidth is N_(PRB), thereduced bandwidth may be defined as N_(TOTAL)=N_(PRB)-N_(PUCCH) and thereduced bandwidth may be located in the center bandwidth and/orelsewhere, where N_(PUCCH) is the number of PRB used or applied for thePUCCH. In certain representative embodiments, the DL resource allocationmay be based on N_(TOTAL). In certain representative embodiments, CSImeasurements, which may include PMI, CQI, and/or RI, may be based onN_(TOTAL).

In certain representative embodiments, a PDSCH RE that may collide witha PRACH resource may be muted. For example, the PDSCH PRB correspondingto the location of the PRACH PRB may be muted. The WTRU 102 may receivethe PDSCH 620 and one or more of the PRBs for the PDSCH 620corresponding to the location of the PRACH resource may be puncturedand/or rate-matched.

Representative PDSCH RE Muting for PUSCH

FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a representative DL PRB structure 1800showing PDSCH RE muting (e.g., applied for interference mitigation forcollisions with an UL DM-RS).

Referring to FIG. 18 , the DL PRB structure 1800 may include a DL PRBpair with a PDCCH region and a PDSCH region. The PDCCH region mayinclude the PDCCH 610 and the DL CRS 630. The PDSCH region may includethe PDSCH 620, the DL CRS 630 and/or the DL DM-RS 640. The PDCCH regionmay be the first N symbols (e.g., 2 or 3 symbols 605-1, 605-2 and/or605-3) The DL PRB pair 1800 may include a plurality of subcarriers(e.g., 12 subcarriers) and may have a plurality of symbols 605-1, 605-2,605,3, 605-4, 605-6 and 605-7 (e.g. 7 symbols) for each slot 0 and 1.The DL CRS 630 may be located in particular subcarriers (e.g., spacedapart such as subcarriers 1, 4, 7 and/or 10, among otherconfigurations). The DL CRS 630 may be located in particular symbols(e.g., symbols 605-1, 605-2 and/or 605-5, among other configurations).The DL DM-RS 640 may be located in particular subcarriers (e.g.,subcarriers 1, 2, 6, 7 11, and/or 12, among other configurations). TheDL DM-RS 640 may be included in one or more symbols (e.g., at the end ofone or more slots of the DL PRB pair 1800 such as the next to last andthe last symbols 605-6 and 605-7 in one or more slots (e.g., slot 0and/or slot 1).

In certain representative embodiments, a PDSCH RE 1810 may collide withthe PUSCH 680 and/or the UL DM-RS 690 located in the PUSCH region andthe PDSCH RE 1810 may be muted to avoid interference. For example, oneor more of following may apply.

(1) The PDSCH RE 1810 that may collide with the PUSCH RE may be muted,if the PUSCH 680 contains or includes UCI. For example, the PDSCH REmuting may be used or applied according to a UCT type. As one example,if the UCT contains or includes ACK/NACK information, the PDSCH REmuting may be used or applied and, otherwise, the PDSCH RE muting maynot be used or applied. In certain representative embodiments, the PDSCHRE muting for (e.g., interference mitigation to) the PUSCH 680containing or including the UCT may be used or applied irrespective ofthe UCI type.

(2) The PDSCH RE 1810 that may collide with the UL DM-RS 690 for thePUSCH region may be muted. FIG. 18 is a diagram of a representativePRB-pair (e.g., a portion of a subframe) having PDSCH RE muting appliedfor (e.g., interference mitigation to) the UL DM-RS 690. If the PDSCH RE1810 is muted for the PUSCH UL DM-RS 690, the WTRU 102 may decode thePDSCH 620 by assuming or providing for either or both of RE puncturingand/or RE rate-matching according to one or more predefined rules.

(3) The PDSCH RE 1810 that may collide with the UL DM-RS 690 for thePUSCH 620 containing or including UCI may be muted, and no PDSCH REmuting may be used or applied for the PUSCH 680 that does not containingor including the UCI. For example, the PDSCH RE muting may be applied orused according to the UCI type. For instance, if a UCI contains orincludes ACK/NACK information, the PDSCH RE muting may be applied orused. Otherwise, the PDSCH RE muting may not be applied or used. Incertain representative embodiments, the PDSCH RE muting for the PUSCH680 containing or including the UCI may be used or applied irrespectiveof the UCI type.

(4) The PDSCH RE 1810 that may collide with the UCI RE within the PUSCH680 may be muted. For example, the PDSCH RE 1810 that may collide withthe ACK/NACK and/or the CSI information may be muted.

Representative PDSCH RE Muting for SRS

FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating another representative DL PRBstructure 1900 with a PRB pair showing PDSCH RE muting of the last DLDM-RS symbol 605-7 in the PRB structure 1900 (e.g., which may be appliedfor collisions (e.g., collision mitigation) with the SRS) and FIG. 20 isa diagram illustrating a further representative PRB structure 2000 witha PRB pair showing RS time shifting (e.g., DL DM-RS time shifting thatmay be applied for collisions (e.g., collision mitigation) with theSRS).

Referring to FIG. 19 , the DL PRB structure 1900 may each include a DLPRB pair with a PDCCH region and a PDSCH region. The PDCCH region mayinclude the PDCCH 610 and the DL CRS 630. The PDSCH region may includethe PDSCH 620, the DL CRS 630 and/or the DL DM-RS 640. The PDCCH regionmay be the first N symbols (e.g., 2 or 3 symbols 605-1, 605-2 and/or605-3) The DL PRB structure 2000 may include a plurality of subcarriers(e.g., 12 subcarriers) and may have a plurality of symbols 605-1, 605-2,605,3, 605-4, 605-6 and 605-7 (e.g. 7 symbols) for each slot 0 and 1.The DL CRS 630 may be located in particular subcarriers (e.g., spacedapart such as subcarriers 1, 4, 7 and/or 10, among otherconfigurations). The DL CRS 630 may be located in particular symbols(e.g., symbols 605-1, 605-2 and/or 605-5, among other configurations).The DL DM-RS 640 may be located in particular subcarriers (e.g.,subcarriers 1, 2, 6, 7 11, and/or 12, among other configurations). Ingeneral, the DL DM-RS 640 may be included in one or more symbols (e.g.,at the end of one or more slots of the DL PRB structure 2000 such as thenext to last and the last symbols 605-6 and 605-7 in one or more slots(e.g., slot 0 and/or slot 1) In certain representative embodiments, oneor more DL DM-RS REs may be muted or one or more symbols associated withthe DL DM-RS 640 may be muted (e.g., the last symbol 605-7 of one of theslots, for example, slot 1 may be muted)).

Referring to FIG. 20 , the DL PRB structure 2000 may include a DL PRBpair with a PDCCH region and a PDSCH region. The PDCCH region mayinclude the PDCCH 610 and the DL CRS 630.

The PDSCH region may include the PDSCH 620, the DL CRS 630 and/or the DLDM-RS 640. The PDCCH region may be the first N symbols (e.g., 2 or 3symbols 605-1, 605-2 and/or 605-3) The DL PRB structure 2000 may includea plurality of subcarriers (e.g., 12 subcarriers) and may have aplurality of symbols 605-1, 605-2, 605,3, 605-4, 605-6 and 605-7 (e.g. 7symbols) for each slot 0 and 1. The DL CRS 630 may be located inparticular subcarriers (e.g., spaced apart such as subcarriers 1, 4, 7and/or 10, among other configurations). The DL CRS 630 may be located inparticular symbols (e.g., symbols 605-1, 605-2 and/or 605-5, among otherconfigurations). The DL DM-RS 640 may be located in particularsubcarriers (e.g., subcarriers 1, 2, 6, 7 11, and/or 12, among otherconfigurations). In general, the DL DM-RS 640 may be included in one ormore symbols (e.g., at the end of one or more slots of the DL PRB pairsuch as the next to last and the last symbols 605-6 and 605-7 in one ormore slots (e.g., slot 0 and/or slot 1) In certain representativeembodiments, one or more DL DM-RS REs may be time and/or frequencyshifted or one or more symbols associated with the DL DM-RS 640 may betime shifted (e.g., the symbols 605-6 and 605-7 of slot 1 may be timeshifted to other symbols, for example, symbols 605-3 and 605-4 of slot1).

For example, the PDSCH RE 1810 that may collide with the SRS may bemuted. In certain representative embodiments, one or more of followingmay apply.

(1) The PDSCH RE 1810 that may collide with a WTRU-specific SRS may bemuted. If the WTRU 102 is configured to transmit the SRS in a subframein or within a specific bandwidth (hereafter sometime referred to as theWTRU-specific SRS bandwidth) and, for example, the WTRU 102 may receiveor may need to receive the PDSCH 620 in the WTRU-specific SRS bandwidth,the PDSCH REs 1810 located in the last OFDM symbol 605-7 within theWTRU-specific SRS bandwidth may be muted. The muting may depend on thefrequency shift (or comb) applied to the SRS transmission. For example,every second (e.g., only every second) subcarrier may use or requiremuting for the SRS in or within the last OFDM symbol (e.g., symbol 605-7of slot 2).

(2) The PDSCH RE 1810 that may collide with the cell-specific SRS may bemuted. If the WTRU 102 receives the PDSCH 620 in the cell-specific SRSsubframe, the PDSCH REs 1810 corresponding to the location of the lastOFDM symbol 605-7 in or within the cell-specific SRS subframe may bemuted.

(3) The WTRU 102 may be configured with a TM using the DL DM-RS forPDSCH demodulation including TM8, TM9 and/or TM10. The PDSCH RE mutingmay be used for WTRU-specific SRS and/or cell-specific SRS. The DL DM-RS640 for the PDSCH 620 may be defined as at least one of following: (i)the DL DM-RS 640 in the last OFDM symbol 605-7 (e.g., of the PDSCHregion) may be muted, for example, as shown in FIG. 19 ; (ii) the DLDM-RS 630 in the last two OFDM symbols 605-6 and 605-7 may be shifted toone or more other locations (e.g., to other OFDM symbols 605-3 and 605-4of the PDSCH region), as shown in FIG. 20 in which the DL DM-RS 640 istime shifted to earlier OFDM symbols; (iii) the DL DM-RS 640 in the lasttwo OFDM symbol 605-6 and 605-7 may be muted; and/or (iv) the DM-RSpattern used or applied for the Downlink Pilot Time Slot (DwPTS) in aTDD special subframe may be reused, among others.

Representative PDSCH Prioritization Depends on Information Type

In certain representative embodiments, a WTRU 102 may have the PDSCH 620scheduled by the eNB 160 and the PDSCH 620 may be given a differentpriority (e.g., as a function of the MAC data, the RLC data and/or thecontrol information included in the PDSCH 620). The PDSCH priority maybe relative to the scheduling of the UL channels and/or RSs. Forscheduling of the PDSCH 620, one or more of the following prioritizationrules may apply.

(1) For prioritization using MAC control information, the PDSCH 620containing or including MAC control information may be prioritizedhigher than the UL channels or the PDSCH 620 containing or including MACdata PDUs (e.g., only MAC data PDUs). For example, the MAC controlinformation may include MAC control elements and/or MAC RAR PDUs asdescribed herein. The PDSCH 620 with the MAC control information may be:(i) prioritized over PUSCH transmissions containing or including data(e.g., only data), as control information may be prioritized over data;(ii) prioritized over the PUSCH transmissions containing or includingdata and control information (e.g., HARQ-ACK and/or UCI, among others);or (iii) prioritized over the PUSCH transmission for control informationonly or the PUCCH transmission, if the DL transmissions arc consideredor set as a higher priority than the UL transmissions, in general.

(2) For prioritization using MAC group control information, the PDSCH620 containing or including MAC control information that is intended formultiple WTRUs 102 may be prioritized higher than the UL channels or thePDSCH 620 containing or including MAC control information for a specificWTRU 102 or MAC data PDUs. For example, MAC CEs intended for multipleWTRUs 102 may include a MAC RAR PDU or MAC Contention Resolution CEs.The PDSCH 620 with MAC group control information may be: (i) prioritizedover the PUSCH 680 containing or including data and/or controlinformation as the PUSCH 680 may be a point-to-point transmissionintended or destined for a single cell/eNB 160; and/or (ii) prioritizedover the PUCCH as the PUCCH may be a point-to-point transmissionintended or destined for the single cell/eNB 160.

(3) For prioritization of control information related to random access(RA), the PDSCH 620 containing or including MAC control information thatmay be used for an RA procedure may be prioritized higher than ULchannels and/or the PDSCH 620 containing or including other MAC dataand/or control information. For example, Contention Resolution MAC CEs,Timing Advance Command MAC CEs, and/or MAC RAR PDUs, among others may beincluded as MAC control information for an RA. The PDSCH 620 includingthe RA control information may be: (i) prioritized over the PUSCH 680containing or including data and/or control information. In certainrepresentative embodiments, the PUSCH transmission including msg3, forexample a CCCH SDU may be prioritized higher than the PDSCH 620; and/or(ii) prioritized over the PUCCH, among others.

(4) For prioritization of RLC AM and/or Automatic Request (ARQ) relatedinformation and data, the PDSCH 620 containing or including one or moreRLC data PDUs and/or control PDUs related to the RLC AM ARQfunctionality may be prioritized higher than the UL channels. Forexample, the RLC AM PDUs for ARQ retransmissions, RLC AM PDUs, which mayinclude the POLL bit, and/or the RLC STATUS control PDU may be includedin the PDSCH 620, which may be considered or set as a higher prioritythan other signals or channels. The PDSCH 620 including the RLC AM ARQrelated data and/or information may be: (i) prioritized over the PUSCH680 which may not include control and/or data related to the RLC AM ARQprocess (e.g., prioritization of the PDSCH 620 over the PUSCH 680containing or including such data and/or control information may dependon prioritization of the UL and the DL in general, for example, thecomposite prioritization of the UL and the DL); and/or (ii) prioritizedover the PUCCH, among others. For example, the PDSCH 620 may not beprioritized over the PUCCH containing or including HARQ-ACK.

(5) For prioritization of data, the PDSCH 620 containing or includinguser plane data may be prioritized over other control information. ThePDSCH 620 may be prioritized differently (e.g., with different priorityrules) depending on whether the PDSCH 620 is based on scheduling by adynamic grant or is based on SPS and/or whether there is no associatedDL grant for the PDSCH 620. The PDSCH 620 including data may be: (i)prioritized over the PUSCH 680 containing or including controlinformation (e.g., only control information). The PDSCH 620 containingor including data may be prioritized below the PUSCH 680, if the PUSCH680 contains or includes (e.g., also contains) user plane data, and theUL is prioritized higher than the DL transmissions (e.g., in general);and/or (ii) prioritized over the PUCCH which may contain of includecontrol information (e.g., only control information).

(6) For prioritization of control information related to WTRU energysavings, the PDSCH 620 containing or including MAC control information(e.g., used to maximize energy savings of a WTRU 102) may be prioritizedhigher than the UL channels. For example, the MAC CE for the DRX Commandand/or the Carrier Aggregation (C A) Activation/Deactivation (e.g.,and/or Activation/Deactivation CE) may be control information, which maybe prioritized higher than other signals or channels such as UL channels(e.g., because they enhance energy efficiency for WTRU operations).

(7) For prioritization of the PDSCH 620 compared to or relative to theUL RSs, the PDSCH 620 may not be prioritized over the UL RSs, forexample the DM-RS and/or SRS among others, and may be (e.g., may alwaysbe) the channel with rate matching, puncturing, and/or RE muting appliedwhen resource collision arc to occur with these channels.

(8) For PDSCH prioritization based on included control informationcompared to the UL channels and the RSs, the UL channels may be ratematched, punctured and/or RE muted according to the disclosure herein,if the PDSCH 620 is considered to be of a higher priority and resourcecollisions are to occur. If the UL channel and/or the RS are consideredto be of a higher priority and resource collisions arc to occur with thePDSCH 620, the PDSCH 620 may be rate matched, punctured and/or RE mutedaccording to procedures described herein.

The WTRU 102 may apply prioritization rules for PDSCH 620 implicitly orbased on rules, as explicitly signaled by the eNB 160. Theprioritization may apply to all configured logical channels or logicalchannel groups commonly or each logical channel may be configured with adifferent set of prioritization rules, for example according to the QoSconfiguration of the logical channel.

Representative PDCCH RE Muting

In certain representative embodiments, a PDCCH RE may collide with thePUCCH and the PDCCH RE may be muted. For example, one or more offollowing may apply: (1) the WTRU 102 may monitor a WTRU-specific searchspace and if any RE Group (REG) (or CCE) for a PDCCH candidate islocated in the PUCCH PRB, the WTRU 102 may skip monitoring the PDCCHcandidate; (2) the WTRU 102 may monitor a common search space and theWTRU 102 may monitor or may need to monitor the PDCCH (e.g., some or allPDCCH) candidates (e.g., irrespective of any collision between the PDCCH610 and the PUCCH (not shown)); and/or (3) the PDCCH bandwidth may bedefined within a reduced bandwidth, among others. For instance, if asystem bandwidth has NPRB number of PRBs, the reduced bandwidth may bedefined or set as N_(TOTAL)=NPRB-N_(PUCCH), the reduced bandwidth may belocated in the center bandwidth and/or the N_(PUCCH) may be defined orset as the number of PRBs used for the PUCCH. In certain representativeembodiments, the REG and/or the CCE may be defined or set to be withinthe N_(TOTAL) bandwidth. In certain representative embodiments, thecommon search space and/or the WTRU-specific search space may be definedwithin the N_(TOTAL) bandwidth. In certain representative embodiments,the number of PRBs for the PDCCH 610 may be changed according to thesubframe type (i.e., the SINTF subframe and/or the NINTF subframe). Forinstance, the PDCCH 610 may be configured over NPRB in the NINTFsubframe and the PDCCH 610 may be configured over N_(TOTAL) subframe inthe SINTF subframe.

In certain representative embodiments, the PDCCH RE that may collidewith the PRACH may be muted. For example, one or more of following mayapply: (1) the WTRU 102 may monitor a WTRU-specific search space and ifa REG or a CCE (e.g., any REG or CCE) for a PDCCH candidate is locatedin the PRACH PRB, the WTRU 102 may skip monitoring the PDCCH candidate;and/or (2) the WTRU 102 may monitor the common search space and the WTRU102 may monitor (e.g., need to monitor) the PDCCH candidates (e.g., someor all PDCCH candidates) (e.g., irrespective of any collision betweenthe PDCCH 610 and the PRACH).

Representative Application of Collision Avoidance

Application of certain representative embodiments, described herein,including for example collision avoidance, may or may only be applied inor for certain resources such as FDRRs and/or resources which may beused in an FDR manner. For a resource which may be a non-FDRR and/orwhich may be used in a non-FDR manner, one or more collision avoidanceprocedures may or may not be used. A non-FDRR may be an RE, RB, and/orsubframe, which may be used or applied for either the UL or the DL at atime. A non-FDRR may include FDD LTE resources associated with orconforming to Rel-8, Rel-9, Rel-10, Rel-11 and/or Rel-12 and/or TDD LTEresources associated with or conforming to Rel-8, Rel-9, Rel-10, and/orRel-11.

When communicating with a non-FDR capable device such as a legacy WTRU102, or one which is not configured for FDR, or in resources notidentified as FDR, collision avoidance may or may not be used orapplied.

In certain representative embodiments, one or more of following mayapply.

(1) The WTRU 102 may transmit the UL signal without RE muting (e.g., anyRE muting) (e.g., related to the DL channel and/or the RS in non-FDRR),since the WTRU 102 may know, determine, set and/or assume that there maybe no collision between the UL and the DL channels.

(2) The WTRU 102 may transmit the UL signal (e.g., with RE muting), ifthe UL signal is to collide with a higher priority DL channel and/or ahigh priority RS in the FDRR.

(3) The eNB 160 may transmit the DL signal (e.g., without RE muting)(e.g., without any RE muting) related to the UL channel and/or the RS ina non-FDRR (e.g., because the eNB 160 may know, determine or assume thatthere is or may be no collision between the DL and the UL channels.

(4) The eNB 160 may transmit the DL signal (e.g., with RE muting), ifthe DL signal is to collide with a higher priority UL channel or RS inthe FDRR.

(5) The UL signal may include one or more of: the PUSCH 680, the PUCCH,the UL DM-RS 690, the SRS, and/or the PRACH, among others.

(6) The DL signal may include one or more of: the PDSCH 620, the PDCCH610, the EPDCCH, the PHICH, the PCFICH, the PMCH, the DL CRS 630, the DLDM-RS 640, and/or the PRS, among others.

(7) The WTRU 102 may transmit the UL channel with a higher priority thana DL channel (e.g., during reception) in a FDRR, if the given resourceis used or applied, as a UL resource for the non-FDR and/or legacy WTRUs102. For example, the WTRU 102 may prioritize UL channels in a FDRRhigher than DL channels, if the resource is allocated on a FDD ULcarrier or a TDD UL subframe (for example, from the perspective of alegacy WTRU). Transmitting the UL with a higher priority than the DL mayindicate that the WTRU 102 may transmit the UL signal without RE muting(e.g., any RE muting) related to the DL channel and/or RS.

(8) The eNB 160 may transmit the DL signal with a higher priority than aUL channel (e.g., during reception) in the FDRR, if the given resourceis used or applied as a DL resource for the non-FDR and/or legacy WTRUs102. For example, the eNB 160 may prioritize transmission of the DLchannels in the FDRR higher than the UL channels, if the resource isallocated on a FDD DL carrier or the TDD DL subframe (for example fromthe perspective of a legacy WTRU 102). Transmitting the DL with a higherpriority than the UL may indicate or provide that the eNB 160 maytransmit the DL signal without RE muting (e.g., any RE muting) relatedto the UL channel and/or the RS.

Representative Power Control Representative Unequal DL Power AllocationBased on UL Channel Collision

The eNB 160 may configure the FDRR in a set of subframes. The ability orcapability to use or apply FDR in a subframe may mean or provide thatthe eNB 160 may provide DL assignments to the WTRUs 102 and UL grants toWTRUs 102 (e.g., possibly the same WTRUs 102) on the same set oftime/frequency resources (e.g., frequency and time REs). In the DL(and/or in the UL) the transmissions may be separated by use of legacyMU-MIMO procedures. The eNB 160 interference from the DL transmissionsmay have a negative impact on proper reception of the UL transmissions.In certain representative embodiments, the eNB 160 may implement unequalDL power allocation on some or all of its DL physical channels (e.g.,the PDCCH, the EPDCCH, the PHICH, the PCFICH, the PDSCH, the PSS/SSS,the PBCH, the DL DM-RS, the CSI-RS, the CRS, and/or the PRS, amongothers) to improve its reception of simultaneous and/or overlapping FDRUL transmissions.

The terms “time/frequency resource” “time-frequency resource” and “TFresource” may be used interchangeably herein.

Unequal DL power allocation may indicate or provide that different DLchannels may have different transmission powers. For example, the PDCCH610 may be transmitted at a different power level than the PDSCH 620. Inother examples, unequal DL power allocation may indicate or provide thatin or within one physical DL channel, the power may be differentdepending on the PRB, the symbol and/or the RE. For example, the PDSCH620 transmitted in or within a PRB may be setup or done with a differentpower level than the PDSCH 620 transmitted in or within a second PRB inthe same subframe. The transmission at different power levels may beapplicable whether or not the two PRBs are scheduled for the same WTRU102. In further examples, the PDSCH RE in or within a PRB may betransmitted with a different power level than another PDSCH RE in orwithin the PRB.

Representative PDSCH Power Allocation

Unequal PDSCH power allocation may be performed to reduce an amount ofeNB SINTF on the UL channels. When the PDSCH power allocation isreferred to herein, it is contemplated that the description may berelevant to an appropriate DL DM-RS 640 associated with the PDSCHtransmission, as well.

In the FDRR, the PDSCH 620 may collide with the UL RSs (e.g., the ULDM-RS 640 and/or the SRS). The UL RSs may be spread over the entireSC-FDMA symbols 655-1 to 655-7. If such a collision is to occur, thePDSCH 620 may use unequal power allocation. The PDSCH 620 transmitted inthe OFDM symbols 605-1, 605-2, 605-3, 605-4, 605-6 and/or 605-7 that maycollide with the UL RSs may be transmitted with a different power offset(e.g., relative to the DL CRS 630) than the PDSCH 620 transmitted in theOFDM symbols 605-1, 605-2, 605-3, 605-4, 605-6 and/or 605-7 without acollision with the UL RSs. For example, an offset of x dB relative tothe CRS transmission power may be provided for the non-colliding PDSCHsymbols 605-3, 605-4, 605-6 and/or 605-1 and a second offset of y dBrelative to the CRS transmission power may be provided for the PDSCHsymbols 605-3, 605-4, 605-6 and/or 605-7 that are to collide.

The SRS transmission may use a comb-like structure such that the SRS maybe interlaced over different REs within a single symbol. The UL SRS mayin addition or alternatively use or apply frequency hopping. In certainrepresentative embodiments, the UL SRS may be located in differentsubsets of subcarriers in different symbols. The PDSCH power allocationmay use or apply different offsets per RE in the symbol that may collidewith the SRS. For example, a first set of subcarriers may have a SRScollision and a second set of subcarriers may not have a SRS collision.For the PDSCH REs, which may collide with the SRS, a first transmissionpower offset (e.g., relative to CRS transmission power) may be used andfor the PDSCH REs which may not collide with the SRS, a secondtransmission power offset may be used.

The PDSCH transmission may collide with the PUCCH from either the sameWTRU 102 or another WTRU 102 served by the cell. In certainrepresentative embodiments, there may be different power offsets (e.g.,relative to DL CRS 630) for the PDSCH 620 in the PRBs which may collidewith the PUCCH and in the PRBs without such collisions. The set of PRBswhere (e.g. associated with) the power offset (e.g., each power offset)used or applied may be explicitly indicated to the WTRUs 102. In certainrepresentative embodiments, the set of PRBs where the WTRU 102 mayexpect (e.g., determine and/or know of) reduced transmission power and(for example, may assume an appropriate power offset) may be implicitlyindicated. For example, the WTRU 102 with a PUCCH transmission in thesame subframe may assume, determine and/or know a second offset of thePDSCH 620 is being used or applied in the PDSCH-PUCCH that are to havecolliding PRBs. Similarly, the PDSCH 620 may collide with the PRACHresources. In such situations, the PDSCH power allocation may use afirst transmission power offset for the REs, the PRBs and/or the OFDMsymbols where there is no collision with the possible PRACHtransmissions, and a second transmission power offset for the REs, thePRBs and/or the OFDM symbols if or where there may be a collision with apossible PRACH transmission.

Representative Configuration of Multiple Transmission Power Offsets

In certain representative embodiments, to enable proper reception at theWTRU, the WTRU 102 may be informed of the power allocation used orapplied for its PDSCH assignments (e.g., one, some or all of its PDSCHassignments). The eNB 160 may indicate to the WTRU 102 the one or moreappropriate transmission power offsets (e.g., relative to the CRStransmission or related to the PDSCH 620 which may not collide with a ULchannel) by, for example: (1) including a new element in the DLassignment DCI that may indicate the set of transmission power offsets,for example along with specific REs/PRBs/symbols where they (e.g., each)may have been or may be contemplated to have been used or applied; (2) asemi-static configuration of a set of transmission power offsets viaand/or based on higher layer signaling; and/or (3) one or morepredefined power offset levels according to and/or based on the ULchannel that may collide (e.g., which may be part of a collision if notavoided). The power offset level may include 0 dB. For example, if aPDSCH resource is to collide with the PUSCH 680, a 0 dB power offset maybe used or applied, while a x dB (where x>0) power offset may be used orapplied, if the PDSCH resource is to collide with the PUCCH.

The transmission power offsets may be updated (e.g., by new transmissionpower offsets). In certain representative embodiments, an update of thetransmission power offsets may be provided as a differential value fromwhich the WTRU 102 may obtain new transmission power offsets bycombining (e.g., arithmetically combining) the differential value withthe previously configured transmission power offsets. In certainrepresentative embodiments, an update procedure may include a singleupdate loop or separate update loops maintained for every transmissionpower offset.

To determine when to use a set of multiple power offset values and onwhat resources, the WTRU 102 may be:

-   -   (1) configured with the specific REs/PRBs/symbols (e.g., where        the power offset may be contemplated have been used or applied        (the configuration may be included in a message (e.g., the same        message) that configures the different power offsets and/or may        be (e.g., always be) included in the DL assignment DCI);    -   (2) configured to determine (e.g., implicitly determine) that        the reduced (e.g., assumed reduced) PDSCH power offset may be        used or applied in REs/PRBs/symbols, for example pre-configured        REs/PRBs/symbols and/or any REs/PRBs/symbols) that are to        collide with appropriate UL signals to be transmitted by the        WTRU 102 (e.g., that WTRU) in the same subframe (for example,        the WTRU 102 may be configured to use or apply a set of power        offsets in (e.g., only in) subframes in which the WTRU 102 has        been granted UL resources (e.g., as well));    -   (3) configured with subsets of subframes in which different sets        of transmission power offsets may be applicable or used (for        example, in the non-FDR subframes, the WTRU 102 may determine,        know, contemplate, assume, apply and/or use a first PDSCH        transmission power offset (in certain representative        embodiments, in FDR subframes, the WTRU 102 may determine, know,        assume, apply and/or use a set of PDSCH transmission power        offsets enabling unequal power allocation); and/or    -   (4) configured with multiple patterns of REs/PRBs/symbols in        which different power offsets may be used or applied. The        patterns may indicate which transmission power offsets may be        tied to and/or may correspond with the REs/PRBs/symbols (each        RE/PRB/symbol) of the DL assignment. The patterns may be        contained in the DL assignment. In certain representative        embodiments, such patterns may be pre-configured via higher        layers. In certain representative embodiments multiple patterns        may be pre-configured), among others.

When the WTRU 102 is pre-configured with one or more sets of poweroffsets and/or patterns of REs/PRBs/symbols (e.g., tied to the differentpower offsets), the WTRU 102 may determine the appropriate set of poweroffsets and/or one or more patterns of REs/PRBs/symbols by any one ormore the following.

(1) One or more indication bits in the DL assignment indicating whatpattern to use for the entire allocated bandwidth. For example, thepatterns may cover single PRBs (or set of PRBs) and/or the DL assignmentmay indicate what pattern to use, apply and/or assume for the PRBs(e.g., every PRB and/or a set of PRBs) of the DL assignment, (e.g., viaor by a bitmap).

(2) The RNTI, used for the DL assignment DCI, may be used to determinethe set of power offsets and/or patterns of REs/PRBs/symbols. The WTRU102 may be configured with a different RNTI depending on whether or notthe subframe is an FDR subframe.

(3) The precoder, used for the PDSCH 620, may be used to determine theset of power offsets and/or patterns of REs/PRBs/symbols. The WTRU 102may be preconfigured with distinct sets of precoders depending onwhether or not the subframe is an FDR subframe.

(4) The bearer, associated with the PDSCH 620, may be used to determinethe set of power offsets and/or patterns of REs/PRBs/symbols. Forexample, the bearers (e.g., each bearer) may have sets (e.g., their ownset) of transmission power offsets.

(5) The contents of the PDSCH 620 may be used to determine the set ofpower offsets and/or patterns of REs/PRBs/symbols. For example, thePDSCH 620 assigned by the RNTI (e.g., that indicates it is used for SIBsor Paging) may use (e.g., always use) a certain set (e.g., a predefinedset) of power offset values.

(6) The set of power offsets and/or patterns of REs/PRBs/symbols may bedetermined by whether the WTRU 102 has a UL grant in the same subframe.The set of power offsets and/or the pattern to be used, applied setand/or assumed may depend on whether the UL transmission of the WTRU 102is a transmission or a retransmission of the PUSCH 680.

Representative RE Mapping of Code Blocks

A transport block in the PDSCH 620 may consist or include of one or morecode blocks. In certain representative embodiments, the maximum codeblock size may be limited to 6144. If the input bit sequence length islarger than the maximum code block size (e.g., 6144), more than one codeblock may be used. The WTRU 102 may receive the PDSCH 620 containing orincluding more than one code block and one of the code blocks may havean error, the WTRU 102 may determine and/or may consider that the PDSCHreception is failed even though the reception of the other code blocksis successful.

In certain representative embodiments, when unequal power allocation isused or applied on different portions of a PDSCH allocation, one or somecode blocks may be more affected than others. For example, some codeblocks may be located in (e.g., fall entirely within) a lower powerportion of the PDSCH 620. The code block most affected (e.g., the worstcode block) may dominate the error events of the transport block errorrate. In certain representative embodiments, the eNB 160 may useenhanced mapping of code blocks to ensure equal error protection overthe code block (e.g., certain high priority code blocks or all codeblocks). The enhanced mapping of code blocks may include one or more offollowing: (1) along with a pattern of REs/PRBs/symbols, the WTRU 102may be configured with multiple code block mappings (e.g., these codeblock mappings may be independently configured or may be tied to eachpossible pattern of REs/PRBs/symbols); (2) the code block mapping may besemi-statically configured and ensure equal protection for any (e.g.,any possible) unequal power allocation; and/or (3) an interleaver may beused to permute coded bit sequences, if multiple code blocks are used,among others.

Representative Link adaptation for Unequal Power Allocation

One or more modulation orders (e.g. QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM) may be usedor applied according to the channel condition and the modulation used orapplied for a PDSCH 620 may be indicated in a DCI associated with thePDSCH 620. If unequal power allocation is used or applied for the PDSCH620 and a subset of REs/PRBs/symbols for the PDSCH 620 has a differentpower allocation than one or more other subsets of REs/PRBs/symbols forthe PDSCH 620, one or more of following may apply: (1) the lowestmodulation order (e.g. QPSK) for the PDSCH REs/PRBs/symbols having lowerallocated power may be used or applied while the modulation order forthe other PDSCH REs/PRBs/symbols having a higher allocated power may beindicated from the associated DCI; (2) the modulation order offset maybe indicated from the associated DCI for the PDSCH REs/PRBs/symbolshaving a lower allocated power and the offset is from the modulationorder indicated from the associated DCI for the other PDSCHREs/PRBs/symbols having higher allocated power; and/or (3) themodulation order for the PDSCH REs/PRBs/symbols having lower allocatedpower may be configured via higher layer signaling while the PDSCHREs/PRBs/symbols having higher allocated power may be indicated from theassociated DCI for the PDSCH 620, among others.

In a TM (e.g., TM3, TM4, TM8, TM9 and/or TM10), one or more transmissionranks may be used or applied. For instance, rank-1 may denote that asingle layer transmission is used or applied and rank-2 may denote thata two layer transmission is used or applied. The transmission rank (e.g.rank-1 or rank-2) may be indicated via the associated DCI for the PDSCH620 in the TM supporting multiple layer transmission. If unequal powerallocation is used or applied for a TM supporting multiple layertransmission, one or more of following may apply: (1) a fixed rank maybe used for the PDSCH REs/PRBs/symbols having a lower allocated powerand the rank may be implicitly or explicitly indicated from theassociated DCT (for instance, rank-1 may be used (e.g., always used) forthe PDSCH REs/PRBs/symbols having the lower allocated power. The rankmay be implicitly indicated by the precoder information, and/orexplicitly indicated as the number of layers. For example, if the fixedrank is used and the rank is smaller than the rank for the PDSCHREs/PRBs/symbols having a higher allocated power, the first n columns ofthe precoder indicated from the associated DCI may be used or appliedwhere n may be a integer greater than 0 and may be the same as the fixedrank used; and/or (2) an offset may be used or applied to indicate therank for the PDSCH REs/PRBs/symbols having a lower allocated power andthe offset may be set or established from the rank used for the PDSCHREs/PRBs/symbols having the higher allocated power.

Representative Combination of Unequal Power Allocation andPuncturing/Rate Matching

In certain representative embodiments, the eNB 160 may use a combinationof unequal power allocation and puncturing/rate matching. For example,to achieve this combination, the WTRU 102 may be configured with a valueof transmission power offset that is interpreted or determined to define(and/or mean) that no PDSCH 620 is transmitted in the associatedresources. For example, a power offset value greater than x dB may beconfigured to indicate to the WTRU 102 that puncturing/rate matching isused or applied on those corresponding or associated resources.

Representative WTRU CSI Feedback

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may feedback CSIdifferently when using unequal power allocation. For the WTRU 102configured with multiple sets of power offsets and/or patterns of theREs/PRBs/symbols, the WTRU 102 may measure CSI with an assumption on orknowledge of the possible power offset set and/or pattern of theREs/PRBs/symbols. For example, the possible power offsets and/orpatterns may be predefined, dynamically established and/or establishedvia higher layer signaling. In certain representative embodiments, theWTRU 102 may explicitly indicate to the eNB 160 the set of offsetsand/or pattern for which a feedback report is valid. In certainrepresentative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may assume, determine or know aset of offsets and/or pattern based on the subframe within which afeedback report is transmitted. In certain representative embodiments,some values of RI, PMI, CQI and/or Procedure Transaction Identifier(PTI) may be pre-configured to be tied to (correspond to) sets of poweroffsets and/or to one or more patterns. Feeding back such values mayimplicitly indicate to the eNB 160 the determinations/assumptions thatthe WTRU 102 has made for the transmitted feedback reports. In certainrepresentative embodiments, the CSI (e.g., each CSI) process may beconfigured with a specific set of power offsets and/or the pattern ofthe REs/PRBs/symbols tied to (e.g., associated with) the power offsets.For aperiodic feedback, the eNB 160 may indicate in the aperiodic CSIfeedback request the set of power offsets and/or the pattern to beapplied, used, set or assumed for the CSI measurements.

Representative UL Power Control Based DL Channel Collision

A first WTRU 102 operating in an FDR subframe may have poor receptioncapabilities due to and/or suffering from SINTF and/or interference fromone or more nearby WTRUs 102 transmitting in the same band, as the bandof first WTRUs 102 used for DL reception. For example, to reduced SINTF,the first WTRU 102 may be configured to operate with unequal powercontrol for different UL transmissions. The unequal UL power controlmay, for example, limit SINTF when UL transmissions arc to collide withspecific DL channels.

The eNB 160 may determine that the procedure (e.g., best or optimum way)to mitigate the SINTF at the WTRU 102 is to increase the DL power forsome REs/PRBs/symbols and/or channels.

It is contemplated that although the procedures arc generally describedwith reference to the WTRU, the procedures may be applicable to the eNB160, as well. For example the eNB 160 may reuse any of the procedureand/or methods for unequal DL power allocation.

Representative Unequal Power Control for PUSCH

In certain representative embodiments, PUSCH power control may beapplicable to the UL DM-RS. The PUSCH 680 may collide with different DLchannels and signals, such as the CRS, the CSI-RS, the DL DM-RS 640, thePRS, the PSS/SSS, the PBCH, the EPDCCH, the PDCCH, the PHICH, and/or thePCFICH. The SINTF from some collisions may be alleviated by usingunequal power control over different PRBs (for example the PSS/SSSand/or the PBCH). Other collisions may use and/or may require usingunequal power control in or within a PRB (for example the CRS, theCSI-RS and/or the DM-RS). Other collisions may use or may require usingunequal power control over entire SC-FDMA symbols (for example in thePDCCH 610).

In representative procedures and/or methods, similar to those describedherein, unequal DL power allocation may be used or applied to providethe WTRU 102 with patterns of REs/PRBs/symbols with different powercontrol. For UL power control, the WTRU 102 may maintain separate loopsfor the PUCCH and the PUSCH 680. In unequal power control, the WTRU 102may maintain multiple loops per UL channel. For example, the WTRU 102may split the REs of the PUSCH 680 into multiple groups (e.g., twogroups) with a first group having a SINTF that may not be detrimental(e.g., may not be overly detrimental, for example, less than athreshold) and a second group having SINTF that may be damaging to theproper reception of the DL transmissions (e.g., may be greater than thethreshold). The power control loop (e.g., each power control loop) maybe associated to a set of REs/PRBs/symbols in which the PUSCH 680 istransmitted. The group (e.g., each group) of REs may have a TPC command(e.g., their own TPC command) to update the power control. Whenproviding the WTRU 102 with the TPC command, the eNB 160 may indicatefor which loop the TCP command is for by one of: (1) an explicitindication tied to or associated with the TPC commands (e.g., a subsetor all the TPC commands) included in the DCT used for UL grant (forexample, TPC commands (e.g., all TPC commands) may be (e.g., always be)included in a UL grant DCI and/or the TPC commands may be indexed and/orordered); (2) a subframe pattern by which a TPC command included in afirst set of subframes is intended for a first power loop, whereas a TPCcommand included in a second set of subframes is intended for a secondpower loop and so on; and/or (3) a TPC-RNTI for power control loop(e.g., each power control loop), among others.

Representative Use of Multiple Power Offsets

In certain representative embodiments, multiple regions of the PUSCH680, in which different UL power allocation may be used or applied, mayemploy the same TPC command. In certain representative embodiments,different transmission power offsets may be used or applied for certainregions, for individual regions and/or for each region. For example, thePUSCH 680 transmitted on REs that may collide with the DL CRS 630 in theDL may use a first UL transmission power offset, and the PUSCH 680transmitted on the REs that may collide with the CSI-RS may use a secondpower offset, and so on for other regions.

In certain representative embodiments, the different transmission poweroffsets may be configured semi-statically via higher layer signaling. Ateach configuration, the WTRU 102 may be provided a list of transmissionpower offsets for the regions (e.g., a subset of the regions or everyregion). In certain representative procedures, the WTRU 102 may beconfigured with different transmission power offsets for each of theregions in the appropriate patterns (e.g., each possible pattern) ofREs/PRBs/symbols that may be used or applied for UL transmissions.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may be configuredwith a first absolute transmission power offset and the othertransmission power offsets (some or all of the other transmission poweroffsets) may be differential to the first value.

Representative Configuration of Different Power Control

The WTRU 102 may be configured to use different power control loopsand/or offsets and/or P_(CMAX) values for different RE/PRB/symbolregions based on or by any one or more of the following.

(1) An indication in the UL grant may inform the WTRU 102 or indicate tothe WTRU 102 of the pattern of power control and/or any relevant inputto be used or applied to determine the appropriate power control for theregions (e.g., each region).

(2) A type of subframe, for which the UL grant. For example, subframesconfigured for MBSFN, for Almost Blank Subframe (ABS) and/or for FDR inthe DL may use or may require different unequal power control thannon-MBSFN, non-ABS and/or non-FDR subframes.

(3) A type of UL channel and/or a format (e.g., a DCI format or otherformat). For example, different PUCCH formats may use different powercontrol loops, power offsets and/or P_(CMAX) values, among others.

(4) Whether a certain type of protection is used or applied in asubframe (e.g., elsewhere in the subframe). For example, if the WTRU 102uses reduced UL transmission power in a symbol to protect the receptionof a channel (e.g. the PDCCH 610), the WTRU 102 may use or apply aspecific power control loop, offset and/or P_(CMAX) in the remainingsymbols of the subframe to ensure adequate Peak-to-Average Power Ratio(PAPR). In certain representative embodiments, upon allocating power toappropriate (e.g., all appropriate) regions of its UL transmission, theWTRU 102 may use filtering to limit the PAPR. The use of the filteringmay be indicated to the eNB 160.

(5) Higher layer signaling for the semi-static configuration of theunequal power control (for example, whether a UL transmission is a newtransport block or a retransmission).

Representative SINTF Handling Representative FDSC Usage and Potentialfor FDSC Interference

Certain subframes may be configured for FDSC operation. For example, theWTRU 102 may be configured or informed by the eNB 160, for example viasignaling that certain subframes may be used or applied for FDSCoperation. The signaling may be at least one of: (1) higher layersignaling such as RRC signaling, (2) MAC layer signaling and/or (3)physical layer signaling.

In certain examples, the WTRU 102 may be configured (e.g., may receiveconfiguration information) via signaling such as RRC signaling as towhich subframes may be considered for (e.g., have potential for) use forFDSC (e.g., FDSC operation). The WTRU 102 may be (or may be further)configured via signaling (e.g., other signaling) such as physical layersignaling as to which subframe or subset of those subframes may be usedor applied at a certain time or during a certain time window for FDSC(e.g., FDSC operation) and/or specifically for FDSC (e.g., FDSCoperation) by the WTRU 102.

In certain examples, a TDD cell may be configured with a TDD UL-DLconfiguration, for example TDD UL-DL configuration 1 from Table 1 asfollows:

D S U U D D S U U D

This TDD UL-DL configuration may be a cell-specific TDD configuration ofthe cell which may be broadcast or otherwise signaled by the eNB 160 andmay be received by the WTRU 102 in the cell.

The TDD LTE WTRU 102 may receive (e.g., from the eNB 160) aconfiguration (e.g., a FDSC configuration) which may identify certainsubframes, for example subframes 3 and 8, as potential FDSC subframes:

D S U F D D S U F D

This configuration (e.g., the FDSC configuration) may be provided bydedicated or WTRU specific signaling such as RRC signaling. The WTRU 102may take certain steps or actions and/or behave in certain ways whichmay include and/or may have an intent of handling interference orpotential interference related to FDSC in or for a certain subframe orsubframes based on the configuration from the eNB 160, which mayindicate that those subframes (e.g., subframes 3 and 8, in the example)may be potential FDSC subframes.

For the WTRU 102 which may support FD operation, SINTF may beinterference from a transmission by the WTRU 102 to the reception by theWTRU 102 (for example the interference of a UL transmission from theWTRU 102 to the DL reception by the WTRU 102). Such interference may ormay only occur when the WTRU 102 transmits and receives simultaneouslyin a FDSC.

The WTRU 102 may experience or expect (or only expect) SINTF inpotential FDSC subframes (e.g., 3 and/or 8 in the example), if the WTRU102 is scheduled for both the UL and the DL in the FDSC in thosesubframes. The FDSC interference from a neighbor WTRU 102 may (or mayonly) occur if the WTRU 102 and a neighbor arc scheduled in oppositedirections in the FDSC in those subframes.

In a given subframe which may be used for FDSC (e.g., subframes 3 and 8in the example), the eNB 160 may or may not schedule both the UL and theDL in the given subframe. When the eNB 160 schedules one WTRU 102 for FDoperation in the given subframe, SINTF at the WTRU 102 may occur. Whenthe eNB 160 schedules different WTRUs 102 in opposite directions in thegiven subframe in the FDSC, neighbor WTRU interference may occurdepending on the relative locations of the WTRUs 102.

The WTRU 102 handling of SINTF and/or neighbor WTRU interference may be(or may only be) used (or may only be necessary) in the subframes inwhich the eNB 160 actually schedules the WTRU 102 or other WTRUs 102 inopposite directions (e.g., in the UL and the DL directions).

The WTRU 102 may take certain steps or actions and/or behave in certainways which may include and/or may have an intent of handlinginterference or potential interference related to the FDSC in or for acertain subframe or subframes, if the WTRU 102 knows, determines and/orunderstands that the eNB 160 intends or may intend to use the subframeor subframes for the WTRU 102 in both the UL and the DL and/or the WTRU102 and at least one other WTRU 102 in opposite directions.

The eNB 160 may inform or indicate to the WTRU 102 directly orindirectly as to whether a certain subframe may be used or applied forthe WTRU 102 for FD operation and/or for the WTRU 102 and another WTRU102 in opposite directions, for example, for the WTRU 102 to knowwhether and/or what type or types of interference handling may be used,needed, required, and/or useful in a subframe such as a current subframeand/or an upcoming subframe.

The WTRU 102 may receive such information via signaling such as physicallayer signaling (and/or another type of signaling such as RRC and/or MACsignaling).

Representative Determination of SINTF and/or NINTF Subframe

A SINTF subframe may be used herein to represent a subframe in whichSINTF may occur and/or a subframe in which a WTRU 102 may transmit andreceive (e.g., simultaneously, concurrently, and/or at the same time) ina FDSC.

A NINTF subframe may be used herein to represent a subframe in whichneighbor WTRU interference may occur and/or a subframe in which a WTRU102 and at least one other WTRU 102 may (e.g., simultaneously,concurrently, and/or at the same time) use an FDSC in oppositedirections.

In the description herein, simultaneous transmission in the UL and theDL may refer to simultaneous transmission in the UL and the DL in aFDSC. In the descriptions herein, transmission in opposite directionsmay refer to transmissions in opposite directions (e.g., with the ULbeing a first direction and the DL being a second, opposite direction)in the FDSC. Simultaneous transmissions may mean transmissions which arefully or partially overlapped in time.

The WTRU 102 may determine that a current or upcoming subframe may be ormay potentially be a SINTF subframe and/or a NINTF subframe based on atleast one of the following.

(1) The determination may be based on whether the subframe is configuredor otherwise identified as an FDSC subframe. For example, the WTRU 102may determine that a subframe may be or may have potential for being aSINTF subframe and/or a NINTF subframe, if the subframe may be or mayhave been configured or otherwise identified as a FDSC or potential FDSCsubframe. In another example, the WTRU 102 may determine that a subframemay not be or may not have potential for being a SINTF subframe and/or aNINTF subframe, if the subframe may not be or may not have beenconfigured or otherwise identified as a FDSC or potential FDSC subframe.

(2) The determination may be based on whether the WTRU 102 may have a ULgrant or UL allocation for the subframe. For example, if the WTRU 102has a UL grant (e.g., a PUSCH grant) or UL allocation (e.g., for a PUSCH680 via SPS or a PUSCH retransmission, a PUCCH, and/or an SRS) for acertain subframe, the subframe may be or may have potential for being aSINTF subframe for the WTRU 102. In a second example, if the WTRU 102does not have a UL grant or UL allocation for a certain subframe, thesubframe may not be or may not have potential for being a SINTF subframefor the WTRU 102 and the WTRU 102 may determine that the subframe maynot be a SINTF subframe. In a third example, the WTRU 102 may determinethat a subframe may be or may have potential to be a SINTF subframe, if(e.g., only if) the WTRU 102 may have a UL grant or a UL allocation forthe subframe of a certain type or types which may include one or more ofa PUSCH grant or allocation, a PUCCH allocation, and/or an SRSallocation, among others. The UL grant or allocation may be provided inaccordance with ordinary LTE (e.g., LTE TDD) scheduling and HARQ timingrules.

(3) The determination may be based on at least one of the time, thefrequency, the RBs, and/or the REs of a UL grant or of a UL allocationfor the subframe and/or at least one of the time, the frequency, theRBs, and/or the REs of a DL allocation for the subframe. For example, ifthe WTRU 102 has the UL grant and the DL grant with overlapping RBsand/or RBs which may be within a certain frequency separation of eachother in a certain subframe, the subframe may be or may have potentialfor being a SINTF subframe for the WTRU 102.

(4) The determination may be based on whether the WTRU 102 may transmitor may intend to transmit in the subframe and/or has something totransmit in the subframe for example, data, control information such asthe UCI, the RS such as the SRS, among others. For example, the WTRU 102may determine that a subframe may be or may have potential for being aSINTF subframe if the WTRU 102 has a UL allocation (e.g., a PUSCH grantor allocation) in the subframe and something (e.g., data and/or UCI) totransmit in the allocation.

(5) The determination may be based on whether the WTRU 102 may beconfigured for both UL and DL in a same subframe according to one ormore SPS configurations. For example, if the WTRU 102 is configured forboth the UL and the DL in a same subframe according to one or more SPSconfigurations, the WTRU 102 may determine that the subframe may be aSINTF subframe or a potential SINTF subframe. In a second example, ifthe WTRU 102 is configured for both the UL and the DL in a same subframeaccording to one or more SPS configurations and the WTRU 102 may havesomething (e.g., data and/or UCI) to transmit in the subframe, the WTRU102 may determine that the subframe is or may be a SINTF subframe or apotential SINTF subframe.

(6) The determination may be based on whether the WTRU 102 may receive aDL allocation, for example via PDCCH 610 (or EPDCCH), for the subframe.For example, based on reception of the PDCCH 610 (or EPDCCH) in a givensubframe, the WTRU 102 may receive a DL resource allocation for thegiven subframe. If the WTRU 102 has a UL grant or other UL allocation(e.g., for a PUSCH 680 scheduled by SPS, a PUSCH retransmission, aPUCCH, and/or a SRS) for the subframe, the WTRU 102 may determine thatthe subframe may be or may have potential to be a SINTF subframe (forexample, based on the existence of the DL allocation and the UL grant orallocation for the subframe and/or certain aspects of the DL allocationand/or the UL grant or allocation such as at least one of the time, thefrequency, the RBs, and/or the REs of the allocated resources). Thedetermination of a SINTF subframe based on a received PDCCH 610 (orEPDCCH) may (or may only) be possible or useful for example: (i) if theWTRU 102 handles or intends to handle the SINTF before beginning the ULtransmission; (ii) if the WTRU 102 has time to decode or attempt todecode the PDCCH 610 before the UL transmission may begin; and/or (iii)if the UL transmission occurs later in the subframe such as for the SRS,among others. In certain examples, if the subframe is one in which theUL transmission (e.g., such as the PUSCH 680 or the PUCCH) may beadjusted to begin after the PDCCH region (or potential PDCCH region)(e.g., a FDSC or potential FDSC subframe), the WTRU 102 may havesufficient time (e.g., enough time) to decode or attempt to decode thePDCCH 610 to determine whether the WTRU 102 may have a DL allocation inthe subframe prior to transmitting in the UL. Beginning the ULtransmission in a subframe after the PDCCH region in that subframe mayenable the WTRU 102 to determine if the subframe may be a SINTF subframeprior to the UL transmission. In other examples, based on reception ofthe PDCCH 610 in a particular subframe, the WTRU 102 may receive a DLresource allocation for the subframe. The WTRU 102 may determine thatthe subframe may be or may have potential to be a NINTF subframe (forexample, based on the existence of the DL allocation and/or certainproperties, characteristics and/or aspects of the DL allocation, such asat least one of the time, the frequency, the RBs, and the REs of theallocated resources. In further examples, if the WTRU 102 does notreceive the DL resource allocation (for example via the PDCCH 610) for agiven subframe such as a potential FDSC subframe, and/or if the WTRU 102does not have a DL SPS allocation for the subframe, the WTRU 102 maydetermine that the subframe may not be or may not have potential to be aSINTF subframe and/or a NINTF subframe. It is contemplated that incertain representative embodiments, the EPDCCH may be substituted forthe PDCCH 610 herein. If the EPDCCH may not be fully decoded by the WTRU102 in a subframe before the WTRU 102 may begin UL transmission in thesubframe, the WTRU 102 may use (or may only use, e.g., with respect toSINTF and NINTF determination) a DL allocation provided by the EPDCCHfor a determination of whether the subframe may be a SINTF subframe asit relates to DL reception and/or a determination of whether thesubframe may be a NINTF subframe.

(7) The determination may be based on whether the WTRU 102 may receiveor expect to receive a DL channel which may not be explicitly granted orallocated by the PDCCH 610 (e.g., the PHICH). For example the WTRU 102may determine that a subframe may be or may have the potential to be aSINTF if the WTRU 102 may be expecting (e.g., in the subframe) and/ormay be configured to receive the PHICH, for example from the eNB 160based on a previous UL transmission.

(8) The determination may be based on an indication, for example anexplicit indication, by the eNB 160 that a current or future subframemay be used for simultaneous FDSC UL transmission and DL reception bythe (e.g., a first) WTRU 102 or the (e.g., the first) WTRU 102 and atleast one other (e.g., a second) WTRU 102.

For example, the WTRU 102 may receive a UL grant in subframe n (e.g.,where n is a non-negative integer) which may allocate resources for theUL transmission for the WTRU 102 in subframe n+k (e.g., k>=0). Alongwith or separate from the UL grant, the WTRU 102 may receive anindication (e.g., one or more bits in a DCI format) which may indicateto the WTRU 102 to consider (and/or determine) subframe n+k to be aSINTF subframe and/or a NINTF subframe.

In other examples, the WTRU 102 may receive the UL grant in subframe n(e.g., where n is a non-negative integer) which may allocate resourcesfor UL transmission for the WTRU 102 in subframe n+k (e.g., k>=0).Separate from or along with the UL grant, the WTRU 102 may receive theindication (e.g., one or more bits in a DCI format) which may indicateto the WTRU 102 that the eNB 160 may or may intend to schedule (and/orconfigure) the WTRU 102 for FD operation (e.g., for DL and UL in theFDSC) in subframe n+k. The WTRU 102 may, for example as a result of theindication, consider and/or determine subframe n+k, as a SINTF subframe.

In further examples, the WTRU 102 may receive the UL grant in subframe n(e.g., where n is a non-negative integer) which may allocate resourcesfor the UL transmission for the WTRU 102 in subframe n+k (e.g., k>=0).Separate from or along with the UL grant, the WTRU 102 may receive theindication (e.g., one or more bits in a DCI format) which may indicateto the WTRU 102 that the eNB 160 may or may intend to schedule (and/orconfigure) FD operation where another WTRU 102 may be scheduled (and/orconfigured) in the DL (or may have an allocation in the DL) in the FDSCin subframe n+k. The WTRU 102 may, for example as a result of theindication, consider and/or determine that subframe n+k is a NINTFsubframe. The WTRU UL transmission may potentially interfere with the DLreception by the other WTRU.

In additional examples, the WTRU 102 may receive the indication via thePDCCH 610 or the EPDCCH (e.g., one or more bits in a DCI format) whichmay indicate to the WTRU 102 to consider and/or determine that a currentor future subframe may be a SINTF subframe and/or a NINTF subframe.

In still further examples, the WTRU 102 may receive the indication viathe PDCCH 610 or the EPDCCH (e.g., one or more bits in a DCI format)which may indicate to the WTRU 102 that in the current subframe (e.g.,the subframe in which the PDCCH 610 or the EPDCCH may be transmitted bythe eNB 160 and/or received by the WTRU 102) the eNB 160 may or mayintend to schedule and/or configure the WTRU 102 for the DL and anotherWTRU 102 for UL in the FDSC and/or vice versa. The WTRU 102 may, forexample as a result of the indication, consider and/or determine thatthe current subframe may be a NINTF subframe.

In certain representative embodiments, parameters and/or otherinformation may be included in the DCI format to assist the WTRU 102 inhandling the SINTF and/or the NINTF.

In still other examples, the WTRU 102 may receive the DL grant insubframe n (e.g., where n is a non-negative integer) which may result ina PUCCH allocation for the WTRU 102 and/or a PUCCH transmission by theWTRU 102 in subframe n+k (e.g., k>=0). Separate from or along with theDL grant, the WTRU 102 may receive the indication (e.g., one or morebits in a DCI format) which may indicate to the WTRU 102 to considerand/or determine subframe n+k, as a SINTF subframe and/or a NINTFsubframe.

The WTRU 102 may receive the indication (e.g., one or more bits in a DCIformat) which may indicate to the WTRU 102 that the eNB 160 may or mayintend to schedule and/or configure the WTRU 102 for FD operation (e.g.,for DL and UL in the FDSC) in subframe n+k. The WTRU 102 may, forexample as a result of this indication, consider and/or determine thatsubframe n+k may be a SINTF subframe.

The WTRU 102 may receive the indication (e.g., one or more bits in a DCIformat) which may indicate to the WTRU 102 that the eNB 160 may or mayintend to schedule the FD operation where another WTRU 102 may bescheduled in the DL in the FDSC in subframe n+k. The WTRU 102 may (forexample as a result of this indication) consider and/or determine thatsubframe n+k may be a NINTF subframe. The WTRU UL may potentiallyinterfere with the other WTRU DL.

In other examples, the WTRU 102 may receive the indication, for examplevia the PDCCH 610 or the EPDCCH (e.g., one or more bits in a DCI format)in subframe n (e.g., where n is a non-negative integer), which mayindicate to the WTRU 102 to consider and/or determine that a certainfuture or upcoming subframe or subframes may be SINTF subframes and/orNINTF subframes. The WTRU 102 may (for example as a result of thisindication) consider and/or determine those subframes to be SINTFsubframes and/or NINTF subframes.

In further examples, the WTRU 102 may receive the indication via thePDCCH 610 or the EPDCCH (e.g., one or more bits in a DCI format)periodically, aperiodically and/or in a certain subframe or subframes(e.g., subframe 0 of every N frames) which may indicate to the WTRU 102to consider and/or determine that a certain future or upcoming subframeor subframes (e.g., the FDSC subframes, such as subframe 3 and/orsubframe 8 in an example, in the N frames) as SINTF subframes and/orNINTF subframes. The WTRU 102 may (for example as a result of thisindication) consider and/or determine those subframes to be SINTFsubframes and/or NINTF subframes.

One of ordinary skill in the art understands that in the variousexamples and embodiments described herein, the relationship between nand n+k may be in accordance with LTE (e.g., LTE TDD) scheduling and/orHARQ timing rules for the UL and/or DL.

Although various representative embodiments have been described withregard to certain subframe attributes, channels and indications, certainrepresentative embodiments may include allocations and/or indicationsfor other channels (e.g., any other channel) and/or transmissions whichmay include, but may not be limited to, periodic or aperiodic SRS, PUCCHwhich may carry periodic or aperiodic CSI, and the like.

FIG. 21 is a flow chart illustrating a representative procedure fordetermining whether a subframe is a SINTF subframe.

Referring to FIG. 21 , flow chart 2100 may include, at block 2110, thata determination is made as to whether a subframe is a FDSC subframe orpotential FDSC subframe. If it is determined at block 2110 that thesubframe is not a FDSC subframe or potential FDSC subframe, processingmoves to block 2170. If it is determined at block 2110 that the subframeis a FDSC subframe or potential FDSC subframe, at block 2120, it isdetermined whether there is a UL allocation for the subframe. If it isdetermined at block 2120 that there is not a UL allocation for thesubframe, processing moves to block 2170. If it is determined at block2120 that there is a UL allocation for the subframe, at block 2130 it isdetermined whether there is something to transmit in the subframe. If itis determined at block 2130 that there is not something to transmit inthe subframe, processing moves to block 2170. If it is determined atblock 2130 that there is something to transmit in the subframe, theprocessing may optionally move to any one of blocks 2140, 2150 or 2160.At block 2140, it is determined whether there is a DL allocation in theFDSC for the subframe. If it is determined at block 2140 that there isnot a DL allocation in the FDSC for the subframe, processing moves toblock 2170. If it is determined at block 2140 that there is a DLallocation in the FDSC for the subframe, processing moves to block 2160.At block 2150, it is determined whether there is a SINTF indication inthe UL grant associated with the subframe. If it is determined at block2150 that there is not a SINTF indication in the UL grant associatedwith the subframe, processing moves to block 2170. If it is determinedat block 2150 that there is a SINTF indication in the UL grantassociated with the subframe, processing moves to block 2160. At block2160, it is determined that the subframe may be a SINTF subframe. Atblock 2170, it is determined that the subframe may not be a SINTFsubframe.

Although blocks 2140 and 2150 are shown as parallel procedures, they maybe accomplished serially in either order. For example, the presence ofthe SINTF indication may be determined and if an indicator is notpresent in the UL grant then whether there is a DL allocation in theFDSC for the subframe may be determined. For example, if the SINTFindication is determined to be present and/or if a DL allocation in theFDSC for the subframe is present, the processing may move to block 2160where the subframe may be determined to be a SINTF subframe andotherwise, processing may move to block 2170 where the subframe may bedetermined to not be a SINTF subframe.

Representative WTRU Behavior for SINTF and/or NINTF Subframe

If the WTRU 102 determines that a certain subframe may be a SINTFsubframe and/or a NINTF subframe, the WTRU 102 may behave in certainways (e.g., perform certain procedures) so as to handle or attempt tohandle the SINTF and/or the NINTF which may (or may potentially) occuror may (or may potentially) be present in the subframe. For example, theWTRU 102 may determine whether to reduce, and/or may reduce, itstransmission power to reduce or attempt to reduce interference (e.g., tosatisfy certain interference limits) in the subframe. As anotherexample, the WTRU 102 may have or may determine a SINTF level (SIL)and/or a supportable SIL and if the SIL exceeds the supportable SIL(e.g., in the SINTF subframe), the WTRU 102 may take action to reducethe STL in the subframe. In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU102 may ensure its transmission power does not exceed an allowed limitin the SINTF subframe and/or the NINTF subframe.

Representative Supportable SINTF Level (SIL)

The WTRU 102 may be able to support a FDSC (e.g., configured for FDoperations), or FD operation in a FDSC, with up to a certain SINTF level(SIL) based on, for example, the implementation, operation and/or typeof the WTRU 102. The supportable SIL or the WTRU's supportable SIL, forexample for the FDSC, may be a function of (and/or may be determined bythe WTRU 102 based on or as a function of) at least one of: (1) the FDSCcarrier frequency of transmission and/or reception; (2) the actualfrequency of transmission and/or reception (e.g., in the FDSC); (3) thenumber and/or frequency location of the RBs which may be allocated forthe UL and/or the DL (for example at a certain time or time window suchas in a subframe, a TTI, and/or a frame, among others); (4) the numberand/or frequency location of the RBs of the transmission and/orreception (for example at a certain time or time window such as in asubframe, a TTT, and/or a frame, among others); (5) the properties ofthe FDSC such as the size of the gap (e.g., the frequency gap and/or theRB gap) between the Tx and Rx of the FDSC or the amount of overlap(e.g., the frequency and/or RB overlap) between the Tx and Rx of theFDSC; (6) the relative frequency location of the RBs and/or the REs ofthe WTRU 102 transmission and/or the RBs and/or REs of the WTRUreception; (7) the relative frequency location of the RBs and/or the REswhich may be allocated for WTRU 102 transmission and/or the RBs and/orthe REs, which may be allocated for WTRU 102 reception; (8) the numberof WTRU antennas being used or applied for transmission and/orreception; (9) eNB transmission parameters such as the CRS power level,the DM-RS power level, and/or other RS power levels, among others; (10)Pathloss; (11) the channel type and/or types of the transmission and/orreception (e.g., the PUSCH 680, the PUCCH, the PDCCH 610, the EPDCCH,and/or the PDSCH 620, among others); (12) the type of RS (e.g., the CRS630 and/or DM-RS) that may be used by or applied for the UL transmissionand/or the DL reception; (13) internal coupling loss of the WTRU 102(e.g. the ability of the WTRU 102 by analog or digital means and/orprocedures to reduce the interference, which may result, for example,from its transmission signal leaking into its receiver (e.g., receivercircuitry); (14) the UL MCS and/or TBS to be used or applied; and/or(15) quality criterion attached to a transmission (e.g., the DLtransmission and/or the UL transmission) (for example, a DL transmissionmay have a QoS (e.g., a required QoS)), among others.

In certain embodiments, the WTRU's supportable SIL may be its maximumsupportable SIL, for example in the case of the FD operation. Forexample, the WTRU's supportable SIL may be or may correspond to asupportable (or maximum supportable) UL power level (e.g., when using FDoperation). For a determination of SIL or supportable SIL, the UL powerlevel may be used herein as a non-limiting example measure, which may beor may correspond to the SIL. UL power and UL power level may be usedinterchangeably.

Although SIL is illustrated herein with regard to UL power level, othermeasures or representation of SIL or supportable SIL may be implementedincluding maximum UL power level, actual UL power level,signal-to-interference ratio and/or bit error rates associated with theone or more FDR.

Although subframes arc illustrated herein as an example of a certaintime or time window, it is contemplated that any other time or timewindow may be used for example, a portion of a subframe and/or multiplesubframes, among others.

Representative Determination and Reporting of SIL and Supportable SIL

The WTRU 102 may determine the (e.g., its) SIL and/or the (e.g., its)supportable SIL, for example for a time (e.g., in a subframe and/orother time or time window) in which the WTRU 102 may transmit andreceive simultaneously and/or concurrently and/or at the same time in anFDSC channel. The supportable SIL may or may not be subframe, time,and/or time window dependent.

In certain examples, the WTRU 102 may determine a maximum supportable ULpower for which the WTRU 102 may support FD operation, which may bereferred to as a maximum FDSC UL power. The maximum FDSC UL power maycorrespond (e.g., by a look-up table or other relationship) to asupportable SIL.

The WTRU 102 may determine the maximum FDSC UL power for a channel or agroup of channels, for example of a serving cell (e.g., the powerassociated with or for any of the PUSCH 680 and/or the PUCCH includingthe combined PUSCH and PUCCH power).

The WTRU 102 may determine the maximum FDSC UL power, which may be basedon at least one or more characteristics of the FDSC channel and/or atleast one of the characteristics or criteria that supportable SIL may bea function of as described earlier herein.

The WTRU 102 may determine the maximum FDSC UL power for a given time ortime interval (e.g., a given subframe and/or other time or time window),which may be based on: (1) one or more characteristics of the FDSCchannel; and/or (2) one or more characteristics of the WTRU 102 transmitsignal and/or receive signal (e.g., in the given subframe and/or othertime or time window).

The WTRU 102 may determine the maximum FDSC UL power for a givensubframe and/or other time or time window, which may be based on anapplicable parameter of or associated with a DL assignment. For example,the applicable parameters of the DL assignment that may affect themaximum UL power may include at least one of: (1) the RB allocation ofthe DL assignment; (2) the MCS level and/or TBS; (3) the number oflayers used or applied for DL transmission; (4) the precoder used orapplied for the DL transmission; (5) the number of ports (e.g., antennaports) used or applied for the DL transmission; (6) the HARQ processnumber; (7) whether the DL assignment is for new data or for aretransmission; and/or (8) the TM, among others.

The WTRU 102 may determine the UL power for transmission on a servingcell and/or on the WTRU 102 as a whole (e.g., as a single combined valueor single power level) and may relate the UL power to a SIL such as anSIL in that subframe.

Representative Supportable SIL Capability

A WTRU, such as one of a certain type, class and/or compliant with acertain standards release, such as a 3GPP LTE standards release, may ormay be required to support at least a certain, e.g., certain minimum,SIL.

The WTRU 102 may send a message or report to the eNB 160 which mayindicate or include the SIL and/or the supportable SIL (e.g., of theWTRU 102). The WTRU 102 may send such a message and/or report using orin higher layer signaling such as RRC or MAC layer signaling and/orusing or in physical layer signaling.

The WTRU 102 may indicate its capability to support FDSC (e.g., FDoperations), for example to the eNB 160. The WTRU 102 may provide theindication using or in higher layer signaling such as in a capabilitymessage. The indication of the ability to support FDSC (e.g., FDoperations) may imply that the WTRU 102 may support at least a certain(e.g., certain minimum) SIL or supportable SIL. The WTRU 102 may providethe indication of its supportable STL, for example to the eNB 160, whichmay be in the form of one or more supportable power levels.

Representative WTRU Reporting of SIL and Supportable SIL

The WTRU 102 may report or otherwise indicate its SIL (and/orsupportable SIL) to the eNB 160 via higher layer signaling such as RRCor MAC layer signaling or via physical layer signaling.

The WTRU 102 may provide the report (and/or indication) periodically(e.g., based on a schedule provided by the eNB 160) or aperiodically (oron-demand) (e.g., based on a trigger such as a physical layer trigger,from the eNB 160, which may be provided in a DCI format).

The WTRU 102 may provide the report in certain subframes such as theFDSC subframes, the SINTF subframes, and/or the NINTF subframes (e.g.,every one of these subframes) in which the WTRU 102 may transmit in theUL, for example if configured to so transmit the report by the eNB 160.

There may be a direct relationship between the subframe in which atrigger may be received and the subframe in which a SIL or supportableSIL may be reported. The relationship may be such that if the trigger isreceived by the WTRU 102 in subframe n, the WTRU 102 may determine theSIL and/or supportable SIL in subframe n+k and may report the determinedvalue or values of the SIL and/or supportable SIL in subframe n+k, forexample, where k may be equal to or greater than zero. The relationshipbetween n and n+k may follow LTE (e.g., TDD LTE) timing for at least oneof: UL scheduling, DL scheduling, UL HARQ, or DL HARQ, among others.

The WTRU 102 may provide the report and/or the indication based on anevent such as the SIL reaching or exceeding a threshold (e.g., which maybe predefined, configured (e.g., by signaling such as RRC signaling) bythe eNB 160, and/or related to the WTRU's SIL or supportable SIL).

The report or indication may correspond to a certain subframe, forexample, such that the eNB 160 may be aware of certain transmissionparameters such as scheduling information (e.g., time and/or frequencyresources assigned or used in the UL and/or DL) which may correspond tothe reported SIL and/or supportable SIL.

The WTRU 102 may or may only send such a report or indication in or forcertain subframes such as at least one of: (1) the FDSC subframes, (2)the SINTF subframes, (3) the NINTF subframes, and/or subframes indicatedby the eNB 160.

The report or indication may include at least one of: (1) the SIL; (2)the supportable SIL; (3) the difference between SIL (e.g., WTRU SIL) andsupportable (e.g., WTRU supportable) SIL (e.g., supportable SIL-SIL);(4) the WTRU maximum power such as P_(CMAX) and/or P_(CMAX,c); (5) themaximum FDSC UL power for the WTRU 102 as a whole and/or for one or moreindividual or groups of UL channels; (6) the WTRU UL power for the WTRU102 as a whole and/or for one or more individual or groups of ULchannels; (7) the difference between a UL power and a maximum FDSC ULpower (e.g., maximum FDSC UL power−WTRU UL power), e.g., for the WTRU102; (8) an indication as to whether the SIL (e.g., WTRU SIL) is morethan a threshold below the supportable (e.g., WTRU supportable) STL(e.g., represented by a single or small number of bits), or theequivalent; and/or (9) an indication that the supportable SIL (e.g., ofthe WTRU 102) has been exceeded, among others.

In certain representative embodiments, the one or more values associatedwith the report or indication may be subframe specific (e.g., may eachbe subframe specific), for example based on at least one subframespecific parameter such as the transmission or reception RBs, or may beindependent of the subframe. In certain representative embodiments, theone or more values may be serving cell specific or for the WTRU 102 as awhole. It is contemplated that the values may also be any combination ofsubframe specific and/or serving cell specific. The WTRU 102 may includevalues for multiple serving cells in a report.

Representative WTRU Reporting When Nearing, Reaching and/or Exceedingthe Supportable SIL

The WTRU 102 may send a report or other indication to the eNB 160 whichmay indicate that the WTRU's SIL (e.g., actual SIL determined orcalculated) may be nearing, reaching or exceeding the supportable (e.g.,WTRU's supportable) SIL. For example, the WTRU 102 may send the reportor indication when the difference between the supportable SIL and theSIL (e.g., the supportable SIL minus the SIL) is below a threshold(e.g., at least one of: less than a certain positive value, zero, or anegative value). Nearing or exceeding the supportable SIL may be one ofthe triggers for sending an SIL or supportable SIL report, as describedherein.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may report and/orindicate that the WTRU 102 may be nearing, exceeding, or has exceededits supportable SIL (e.g., to the eNB 160) via higher layer signalingsuch as RRC or MAC layer signaling or via physical layer signaling. TheWTRU 102 may send an indication in the PUCCH or in the UCI which may becarried by the PUSCH 680 (for example in a subframe in which the WTRU'sSIL has exceeded its supportable SIL and/or in a subframe in which theWTRU 102 has modified its UL transmission to have its SIL not exceed itssupportable SIL).

Representative WTRU Behavior in Case of SIL Exceeding Supportable SIL

The WTRU 102 may modify an intended or desired UL transmission based onthe (e.g., its) supportable SIL. For example, if the WTRU 102 determinesin a subframe in which the WTRU 102 may transmit and receivesimultaneously in an FDSC that the (e.g., its) supportable SIL may beexceeded, the WTRU 102 may modify the UL transmission (e.g., may reduceits transmission power).

If the WTRU 102 determines that a subframe may be used for transmissionby the WTRU 102 and may be a SINTF subframe, the WTRU 102 may modify theUL transmission (e.g., reduce its transmission power). The WTRU 102 maydetermine that the subframe may be a SINTF subframe in accordance withprocedures described herein.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may modify and/orreduce the power level of the UL transmission (e.g., transmit at a lowerpower level) prior to actual transmission (for example, such that theSTL of the WTRU 102 may not exceed the supportable SIL (e.g., of theWTRU 102). In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 maymodify and/or drop (e.g., not transmit or transmit at zero power) one ormore UL channels, for example such that the SIL may not exceed thesupportable STL.

Such a modification, power reduction, and/or channel dropping may beapplicable in certain subframes, for example potential FDSC subframes,SINTF subframes, and/or specific subframes indicated by the eNB 160,among others.

Whether or not to modify the UL transmission may be dependent on thespecific channels to be transmitted and/or received in a subframe, suchas a FDSC subframe. For example, certain channels may have a higherpriority (e.g., an established or predefined higher priority) thancertain other channels. Priorities may be defined or assigned for the ULand DL channels such that a particular UL channel may or may only bemodified (e.g., by a WTRU 102), if a particular higher priority channelmay be interfered with in the DL (e.g., as determined by the WTRU 102,for example according to the defined or configured channel priorities, apriority list, priority index and/or priority table).

In certain representative embodiments, if the modification of the ULtransmission occurs or is needed, for example to reduce power such thatthe (e.g., the WTRU's) SIL does not exceed the (e.g., its) supportableSIL and/or the WTRU's UL power does not exceed the (e.g., the WTRU's)maximum FDSC UL power, power allocation (e.g., by the WTRU 102) toand/or scaling (e.g., by the WTRU 102) of channels which may betransmitted may follow power scaling rules (e.g., which may be similarto LTE maximum power rules). The power scaling rules may allocateavailable power to the PUCCH channel first if any, and the remainingpower may be allocated to any PUSCH 680 with the UCI. Power remainingafter allocation to the PUCCH channel and the PUSCH 680 with the UCI maybe to any PUSCH 680 without UCI. If there is no remaining power forcertain channels, those channels may be dropped (e.g., not transmittedor transmitted at zero power). In certain representative embodiments,alternate or additional rules may be applied based on the priorities ofthe UL and the DL channels.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may modify its CSIreports based on the determined or calculated SIL. For example, the WTRU102 may indicate a lower rank indication (RI) and/or CQI or a differentPMI based on the SIL. The WTRU 102 may indicate to the eNB 160 in itsfeedback report that the CSI has been affected by high SIL. For example,the feedback report may include the CSI along with an indicator that theCSI was impacted by and/or affected by, for example the SIL or the SILexceeding a threshold (e.g., the supportable SIL).

Representative Maximum Power Including Supportable SIL

Power modification and/or power reduction to adjust, limit or reduce theSIL may be combined with the LTE maximum power rules. The WTRU 102 mayconfigure its maximum power for a serving cell or for the WTRU 102 as awhole accounting for its supportable SIL and/or maximum FDSC UL power.For example, the maximum (e.g., maximum WTRU configured) UL power may beor may be replaced by the lower of the ordinary maximum (e.g., maximumWTRU configured) UL power (e.g., P_(CMAX) and/or P_(CMAX,c)) and thesupportable (e.g., the WTRU's supportable) STL or supportable (e.g.,WTRU's supportable) Sit maximum power (e.g., maximum FDSC UL power). Thesupportable SIL (e.g., maximum FDSC UL power) may be serving cellspecific (e.g., for the WTRU 102) and/or specific to the WTRU 102 as awhole.

In certain representative embodiments, the signaled maximum UL power onthe serving cell (e.g., P_(EMAX,c)) may be replaced by the lower of thesignaled maximum and the supportable (e.g., the WTRU's supportable) SILmaximum power (e.g., maximum FDSC UL power) for the serving cell. Forexample, when the WTRU 102 configures the maximum output powerP_(CMAX,c) on the serving cell c, the WTRU 102 may set the P_(CMAX,c)value within the following bounds:

P _(CMAX_L,c) ≤P _(CMAX,c) ≤P _(CMAX_H,c)  (1)

For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, the lower bound may be,for example:

P _(CMAX_L,c)=MIN{P _(EMAX,c) −ΔT _(C,c) ,P _(PowerClass)−MAX(MPR _(c)+A-MPR _(c) ,P-MPR _(c))−ΔT _(C,c)}  (2)

For inter-band carrier aggregation, the lower bound may for example be:

P _(CMAX_L,c)=MIN{P _(EMAX,c) −→T _(C,c) ,P _(PowerClass)−MAX(MPR _(c)+A-MPR _(c) +ΔT _(IB,c) ,P-MPR _(c))−ΔT _(C,c)}  (3)

The higher (or upper) bound may be, for example:

P _(CMAX_H,c)=MIN{P _(EMAX,c) ,P _(PowerClass)}  (4)

P_(EMAX,c) may be a value signaled by the eNB 160. P_(PowerClass) may bethe maximum WTRU power which may be based on its power class. Theremaining terms in the equations may be allowed power reductions, forexample to comply with spectral mask requirements, specific absorptionrequirements (SAR), and the like.

In certain representative embodiments, P_(EMAX,c) may be replaced ormodified (e.g., by the WTRU 102) by the minimum of P_(EMAX,c) and themaximum FDSC UL power for serving cell c (e.g., for the WTRU 102), forexample, in the lower and/or upper bound of P_(CMAX,c), and may beapplicable in certain subframes such as potential FDSC subframes, SINTFsubframes, NINTF subframes, and/or specific subframes indicated by theeNB 160, among others.

In certain representative embodiments, the minimum (MIN) function in anupper and/or lower bound of the P_(CMAX) and/or the P_(CMAX,c) may beexpanded to include another term which may be the maximum FDSC UL power.For example, Equation (2) may become:

P _(CMAX_L,c)=MIN{P _(EMAX,c) −ΔT _(C,c) ,P _(PowerClass)−MAX(MPR _(c)+A-MPR _(c) ,P-MPR _(c))−ΔT _(C,c),maximum FDSC UL power}  (5)

In certain representative embodiments, Equation (4) may become:

P _(CMAX_H,c)=MIN{P _(EMAX,c) ,P _(PowerClass),maximum FDSC ULpower}  (6)

Representative Signaled Maximum Power for the NINTF and/or the SINTF

The WTRU 102 may receive the configuration of a maximum power level, forexample from the eNB 160, which the WTRU 102 may not exceed in certainsubframes such as in the SINTF subframes and/or the NINTF subframes. Theconfiguration may be provided using or in higher layer signaling such asin RRC signaling or in physical layer signaling. In certainrepresentative embodiments, the configuration may be provided using orin higher layer signaling and may be applied based on an indicationusing or in physical layer signaling.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive amaximum power value, (e.g., P_(IMAX) and/or P_(IMAX,c)), which the WTRU102 may use or apply to limit, to adjust and/or to reduce the UL powerof the WTRU for the serving cell c and/or the UL power for WTRU 102 as awhole (e.g., the total UL power of the WTRU 102 (e.g., for transmissionto all cells)), for example to reduce interference (e.g., interferenceto a neighbor WTRU 102) in a FDSC subframe. This received maximum powervalue may be referred to as the signaled interference maximum power.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may apply or mayonly apply the P_(IMAX) and/or P_(IMAX,c) in a subframe which itdetermines to be a SINTF subframe and/or a NINTF subframe.

In a determination by the WTRU 102 of its configured maximum outputpower for the serving cell or for the WTRU 102 as a whole, the WTRU 102may include P_(IMAX) and/or P_(IMAX,c).

In certain representative embodiments, P_(EMAX,c) may be replaced ormodified (e.g., by the WTRU 102) by the minimum of P_(EMAX,c) andP_(IMAX,c) for example in the lower and/or upper bound of P_(CMAX,c).This replacement or modification may be applicable in certain subframessuch as potential FDSC subframes, SINTF subframes, NINTF subframes,and/or specific subframes indicated by the eNB 160, among others.

In certain representative embodiments, the minimum (MIN) function in anupper and/or lower bound of P_(CMAX) and/or P_(CMAX,c), may be expandedto include another term which may be P_(IMAX) and/or P_(IMAX,c). Forexample, Equation (2) may become:

P _(CMAX_L,c)=MIN{P _(EMAX,c) −ΔT _(C,c) ,P _(PowerClass)−MAX(MPR _(c)+A-MPR _(c) ,P-MPR _(c))−ΔT _(C,c) ,P _(IMAX,c)}  (7)

In certain representative embodiments, Equation (4) may become:

P _(CMAX_H,c)=MIN{P _(EMAX,c) ,P _(PowerClass) ,P _(IMAX,c)}  (8)

In certain representative embodiments, one or both of the maximum FDSCUL power and the signaled interference maximum power may be accountedfor when determining the maximum WTRU UL power, for example in asubframe. A WTRU 102 may apply one or both of the maximum FDSC UL powerand the signaled interference maximum power depending on whether thesubframe may be a SINTF subframe and/or a NINTF subframe (e.g., whichone to apply or whether to apply both may depend on whether the subframemay be a SINTF subframe and/or a NINTF subframe). For example, the WTRU102 may account for the maximum FDSC UL power in a subframe which may bedetermined by the WTRU 102 to be a SINTF subframe. In another example,the WTRU 102 may account for the signaled interference maximum power ina subframe which may be determined by the WTRU 102 to be a NINTFsubframe. A subframe may be both a SINTF subframe and a NINTF subframe.

Representative Prioritization Based on Channels

Channels may be handled by the WTRU 102 based on priorities (e.g., therelative priorities) of the channels. For example, the WTRU 102 maydetermine whether or not to modify the UL transmission in a subframe(for example a subframe which may be at least one of a FDSC subframe, apotential FDSC subframe, a SINTF subframe, and/or a NINTF subframe)based on the priorities of the channels the WTRU 102 may transmit in theUL as compared to the priorities of the channels which may betransmitted and/or received in the DL in the same subframe.

The WTRU 102 may determine whether to modify the UL transmission (forexample whether to modify the power of one or more channels it maytransmit in a subframe) based on the relative priorities of the ULchannels (e.g., the UL channels which may be transmitted by the WTRU102) and the DL channels which may be transmitted by the eNB 160 and/orreceived by the WTRU 102 in the subframe. For example, the WTRU 102 maymake the determination in a subframe in which the WTRU's SIL may exceedits supportable SIL.

Modifying the UL transmission may include scaling and/or dropping (e.g.,not transmitting or transmitting at a zero power level) one or morechannels which the WTRU 102 may transmit in the UL.

The DL control channel (e.g., the PDCCH 610 and/or the EPDCCH) may havea higher priority than one or more of: (1) the PUSCH channels which maycarry data (e.g., only data); (2) the PUSCH channels which may carry UCIsuch as any UCI or certain UCI (e.g., ACK/NACK information); (3) thePUCCH channel (for example any PUCCH channel); and/or (4) the PUCCHchannel which may carry ACK/NACK information, among others. For example,the DL control channel may have a lower priority than the PUCCH carryingthe ACK/NACK and may have a higher priority than the PUCCH not carryingthe ACK/NACK. The DL control channel may have a lower priority than thePUSCH 680 carrying the UCI which may include ACK/NACK and may have ahigher priority than the PUSCH 680 not carrying the UCI which mayinclude ACK/NACK.

In certain representative embodiments, the PDSCH 620 carrying certaininformation, referred to herein as “priority” information may have ahigher priority than one or more of: (1) the PUSCH channels which maycarry data (e.g., only data); (2) the PUSCH channels which may carry UCIsuch as any UCI or certain UCI (e.g., ACK/NACK information); (3) thePUCCH channel (for example, any PUCCH channel); and/or (4) the PUCCHchannel which may carry ACK/NACK information. The priority informationthat the PDSCH 620 may carry may include at least one of systeminformation (e.g., any system information, any system information whichmay be applicable to the WTRU 102, or certain system information such ashigh priority system information) and/or paging information.

In certain examples, if the WTRU 102 may know (or knows) or maydetermine (or determines) (for example based on a configuration whichmay be signaled to the WTRU 102 via broadcast and/or RRC signaling thatmay be from an eNB 160) that a certain subframe may be one in which theWTRU 102 may monitor or receive EPDCCH or may receive the PDSCH 620carrying priority information, the WTRU 102 may modify the UL channelsthe WTRU 102 may transmit in the subframe which may be of a lowerpriority than the EPDCCH (or the PDSCH 620 carrying the priorityinformation). For such a subframe, the WTRU 102 may, for example to notexceed SIL, scale or drop (e.g., not transmit or transmit at zero power)the PUSCH 680 (for example the PUSCH carrying data (e.g., only data),the PUSCH 680 not carrying ACK/NACK information, and/or any PUSCH 680,among others).

In certain representative embodiments, for such a subframe, if it is (ormay be) necessary or useful to reduce the power of the PUCCH to notexceed the WTRU's supportable SIL and if it is not (or may not be)necessary or useful to reduce the PUCCH power otherwise, the WTRU 102may not reduce the power of the PUCCH, for example if the PUCCH carriesACK/NACK information.

In certain representative embodiments, for such a subframe, if it is (ormay be) necessary or useful to reduce the power of the PUSCH 680carrying the UCI (e.g., any UCI or certain UCI which may be or includeACK/NACK information), to not exceed the WTRU's supportable SIL and ifit is not (or may not be) necessary or useful to reduce the PUSCH powerotherwise, the WTRU 102 may not reduce the power of the PUSCH 680.

In certain examples, if the WTRU 102 may know (or knows) or maydetermine (or determines) (for example based on a configuration whichmay be signaled to the WTRU 102 via broadcast and/or RRC signaling thatmay be from an eNB 160) that a certain subframe may not be one in whichthe WTRU 102 may monitor or receive EPDCCH and/or may not be one inwhich the WTRU 102 may receive the PDSCH 620 carrying priorityinformation, the WTRU 102 may not modify its UL transmissions (forexample, to ensure that it does not exceed its supportable SIL), if sucha modification is not warranted for other reasons.

For subframes in which the PDCCH 610 may be monitored and/or received bythe WTRU 102, the WTRU 102 may modify the UL transmission in one or moreof those subframes (for example, similar to the manner described forEPDCCH), based on the priorities (e.g., relative priorities) of thePDCCH 610 and the UL channels that the WTRU 102 may transmit. Amodification, such as a reduction in power or dropping of a UL channel,may apply to the entire subframe or may apply to the symbols which mayoverlap with the PDCCH region.

Representative FDSC DL Handling

In a subframe which may be an FDSC subframe, if a (e.g., a first) WTRU102 monitors the PDCCH 610 and/or the EPDCCH and/or receives or expectsto receive the PDSCH 620 in the subframe, the WTRU 102 (e.g., the firstWTRU) may take into account (e.g., based on a priori knowledge), ULtransmissions by another (e.g., a second) WTRU 102 which may be made inthe same FDSC (or FDSC subframe) as the DL transmissions (e.g., whichmay be intended for or received by the first WTRU 102). For example, theWTRU 102 (e.g., the first WTRU) may perform certain processing in the DL(for example to reduce or take into account the UL signal and/or SINTFor NINTF which may be present in the subframe).

The WTRU 102 (e.g., the first WTRU) may be provided with the knowledge(e.g., of the UL transmissions by the other or second WTRU 102) forexample by an eNB 160, via physical layer signaling. For example, thePDCCH 610 or the EPDCCH in subframe n may provide information to theWTRU 102 (e.g., the first WTRU) regarding UL transmissions which may bescheduled for or made by another WTRU 102 (e.g., the second WTRU) insubframe n or a future subframe such as subframe n+k (e.g., where thevalue of k may be provided or may be known, such as by definition, or byscheduling and/or by HARQ timing rules). The WTRU 102 (e.g., the firstWTRU) which may receive in the DL may be provided with parameters. Forexample the parameters may include UL scheduling information for theother WTRU 102 (e.g., the second WTRU) which may transmit in the UL. TheUL scheduling information may assist the WTRU 102 (e.g., the first WTRU)with reception in the DL, for example by enabling cancellation ofinterference from other WTRUs 102 (e.g., the second WTRU). In responseto the UL scheduling information, the WTRU 102 (e.g., the first WTRU)which may receive in the DL may perform special processing, such asinterference cancellation in subframe n or n+k.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 (e.g., the firstWTRU) may be provided with information regarding scheduling for otherWTRUs 102 (e.g., the second WTRU and/or other WTRUs 102) that mayidentify potential scheduling for the other WTRUs 102 in the oppositedirection (e.g., from the first WTRU 102) for a period of time. Forexample, the WTRU 102 may be informed that certain RBs may be used orapplied for FDSC (or FD operation) for a certain period of time. TheWTRU 102 may take the scheduling information (e.g., potential RB usagefor FDSC or FD operation) into account, for example in FDSC subframesfor that period of time. The scheduling information may be provided tothe WTRU 102 by the eNB 160 (e.g., via physical layer signaling) in oneor more subframes (e.g., certain subframes such as subframe 0).

Representative MBSFN Usage for Full Duplex Operation

MBSFN subframes may be used or applied as FDSC or potential FDSCsubframes. MBSFN subframes may be subframes which may be used or appliedfor Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) or subframes which maybe indicated, for example by broadcast or other signaling, as reserved,for example for MBMS. This configuration may be cell-specific and/or maybe provided or indicated by the eNB 160 in a System Information Block(SIB) (for example, SIB1). The configuration of the MBSFN subframes mayindicate which subframes of a frame and/or which frames may be used orapplied for MBMS or reserved, for example for MBMS.

When a subframe, such as an MBSFN subframe, is used or applied for MBMS,a Physical Multicast Channel (PMCH) may be transmitted in the subframe.For a subframe that may be configured as an MBSFN subframe in which thePMCH is not transmitted, the subframe may be used or applied for otherpurposes including, for example, normal data transmission (e.g., a PDSCHtransmission) to one or more WTRUs 102 which may receive and/or read acontrol channel such as the PDCCH 610 or the EPDCCH in the subframe todetermine whether in the subframe the PDSCH 620 may be transmittedand/or intended for that WTRU 102.

In a subframe which may be configured as an MBSFN subframe, one or moreof the following may apply to the subframe: (1) the subframe may have acontrol or non-MBSFN region and a data or MBSFN region; (2) the PMCH maybe transmitted in the subframe in the data or the MBSFN region; (3) thePDSCH 620 may be transmitted in the subframe in the data or the MBSFNregion; (4) the DL CRS 630 may not be transmitted in the data or theMBSFN region; (5) the PCFICH and/or the PHICH may be transmitted in thenon-MBSFN region or the control region; (6) the PDCCH 610 may or may notbe transmitted in the non-MBSFN region or the control region; (7) thecontrol or non-MBSFN region may comprise a certain number of symbols(e.g., 2 symbols), which may have normal or extended CP length where theCP length may correspond to the CP length used or applied for thenon-MBSFN subframes in the cell such as subframe 0; and/or (8) the dataor the MBSFN region may comprise a certain number of symbols and acertain CP length may be used or applied (for example: (i) the number ofsymbols may be 10 when extended CP length is used or applied, forexample for carrier frequency separation of 15 kHz; (ii) extended CPlength may be used or applied, when the PMCH is transmitted in thesubframe; and/or (iii) the extended CP length may be used or applied,when the PDSCH 620 is transmitted in the subframe (for example whenextended CP length is used or applied for non-MBSFN subframes in thecell, such as subframe 0); (iv) the number of symbols may be 12 when anormal CP length is used or applied; and/or (v) the normal CP length maybe used or applied, when the PDSCH 620 is transmitted in the subframe(for example when normal CP length is used or applied for non-MBSFNsubframes in the cell such as subframe 0), among others.

An MBSFN subframe in which the PMCH may not be transmitted may be usedor applied as a FDSC subframe (e.g., allocated as a FDSC subframe) or apotential FDSC subframe. In certain examples, the WTRU 102 may expect ordetermine that the MBSFN subframe (e.g., any MBSFN subframe) in whichthe PMCH may not be transmitted may be used or applied as an FDSCsubframe. In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may expector determine the MBSFN subframe may be used or applied as a FDSCsubframe based on the PMCH and/or the MBMS service schedulingindications from the eNB 160.

In certain examples, the WTRU 102 may expect or determine the MBSFNsubframe may be used or applied as a FDSC subframe based on the UL grantthat is scheduled (or that schedules UL transmission) in the MBSFNsubframe. For example, if a UL grant is received for an MBSFN subframeor a UL transmission is scheduled in an MBSFN subframe, the WTRU 102 mayexpect or determine the MBSFN subframe may be used or applied as a FDSCsubframe.

In certain examples, the WTRU 102 may expect or determine the MBSFNsubframe may be used or applied as a FDSC subframe based the DL grantindicated in the PDCCH 610 in the control or the non-MBSFN region of theMBSFN subframe. For example, if a DL grant is indicated in the PDCCH 610in the control or the non-MBSFN region of the MBSFN subframe, the WTRU102 may expect or determine the MBSFN subframe may be used or applied asa FDSC subframe.

An MBSFN subframe in which PMCH may be transmitted may be used orapplied as a FDSC subframe. For example, the WTRU 102 may expect ordetermine that a MBSFN subframe is also a FDSC subframe based on the ULgrant that is scheduled (or that schedules UL transmission) in the MBSFNsubframe. In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may expector determine that a MBSFN subframe is also a FDSC subframe if the WTRU102 may be allocated (e.g., otherwise than by a grant) to transmitcontrol information (e.g., UCI and/or SR in the UL) in the MBSFNsubframe. The WTRU 102 may determine or receive an indication that theMBSFN subframe (e.g., the MBSFN in which PMCH may be transmitted and/orwhich may be used or applied as a FDSC subframe) may also be a potentialSINTF subframe and/or a potential NINTF subframe.

In the MBSFN subframe, which may be an FDSC subframe, the PDSCHtransmission may be (e.g., may always be) limited to certain TMs such asthose which may rely on the DM-RS for demodulation (e.g., TM 9 and/or TM10) and/or which may not rely on DL CRS 630 for demodulation.

In the MBSFN subframe which may be an FDSC subframe, the WTRU 102 mayassume, know or may determine that the DL CRS 630 may not be present inthe MBSFN or the data region in the subframe. The WTRU 102 may notadjust its transmission in the UL in that subframe to account for the DLCRS 630 in the DL data or the MBSFN region of the subframe.

In the MBSFN subframe, the FDSC resources may be allocated to or in anyof: (1) the MBSFN region (e.g., only the MBSFN region) of the subframe;and/or (2) the symbols (e.g., all the symbols) of the subframe (e.g.,both the MBSFN and the non-MBSFN regions of the subframe).

For the WTRU 102 which may transmit in the UL in the MBSFN subframe,which may be a FDSC subframe, the WTRU 102 may adjust its ULtransmission based on the relative priorities of the channels which itmay transmit in the UL and which may be present in the DL in one or moreof the non-MBSFN region and the MBSFN-region of the subframe.

FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a representative method 2200implemented in a WTRU 102 using time-frequency (TF) resources forcommunications in first and second directions.

Referring to FIG. 22 , the representative method 2200 may include, atblock 2210, the WTRU TF resource muting or symbol muting one or more TFresources for communication in the first direction based on informationassociated with a communication in the second direction or the WTRUsubframe shortening by one or more TF resources for communication in thefirst direction based on information associated with a communication inthe second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive thecommunication in the second direction and may detect or determine theinformation associated with the communication in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may obtain any of: alist, an ordered list or an indication of priority signaling, ofpriority channels, of priority resources, of priority Resource Elements(REs), of priority Resource Blocks and/or priority symbols.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may be configured toreceive at least a portion of the communication in the second directionwhile transmitting at least a portion of the communication in the firstdirection.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may establish timeintervals in which the communications in the first and seconddirections: (1) overlap in frequency and/or (2) a first frequency or afirst frequency band of the communication in the first direction iswithin a threshold of a second frequency or a second frequency band ofthe communication in the second direction. For example, the WTRU 102 maybe configured or may configure itself to enable FDR operations.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may set one or moresubframes that are to include Full Duplex Resources (FDR). For example,the WTRU 102 may set the FDR subframes based on information from aNetwork Access Point (NAP) (e.g., a HeNB or eNB 160 or other accesspoint device).

In certain representative embodiments the WTRU 102 may set the one ormore subframe as one or more MBSFN subframes.

In certain representative embodiments, the TF resources may include anyof: (1) one or more Resource Elements (REs), one or more Resource Blocks(RBs), and/or (3) one or more symbols.

In certain representative embodiments, the shortened subframe mayinclude one or more symbols which are muted.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute the one ormore TF resources via any of: (1) a blanking operation; (2) a puncturingoperation; (3) a rate matching operation; and/or (4) a transmissionpower control operation.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may adjusttransmission power levels between or among subsets of the TF resourcesassociated with the communication in the first direction to reduce orsubstantially eliminate interference to the communication in the seconddirection that is being concurrently communicated to the WTRU 102.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may be configured toapply any of: (1) respectively different power control loops, (2)respectively different power control offsets and/or (3) respectivelydifferent P_(CMAX) values for different TF resources associated withdifferent TF regions based on a grant or DL control information (DCI).

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may set atransmission power level of a first subset of the TF resources to areduced level relative to a transmission power level of a second subsetof the TF resources.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may adjust amodulation order of the first subset of the TF resources to any of: (1)a reduced modulation order and/or (2) a lowest modulation order.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may apply any of:(1) a fixed rank indicated from the DCI for the first subset of TFresources; and/or (2) a first rank indicated from the DCI for the firstsubset of TF resources that is smaller than a second rank for the secondsubset of TF resources.

In certain representative embodiments, the first rank may be indicatedby an offset in the DCI.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive, in theDCI, a first modulation order for a first subset of a plurality of TFresources and a second modulation order for a second subset of theplurality of TF resources.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may set a modulationorder of the first subset of the TF resources to the first modulationorder and a modulation order of the second subset of TF resources to thesecond modulation order based on the received DCI.

In certain representative embodiments, the reduced level for setting thetransmission power level of the first subset of the TF resources may bea zero power level or a non-zero power level which enables thecommunication in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive (e.g.,in the DCI) a first transmission power control (TPC) indicatorassociated with the first subset of the TF resources and a second TPCindicator associated with the second subset of the TF resources.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may adjust atransmission power level of the first subset of the TF resources basedon the received first TPC indicator in the DCI and may adjust atransmission power level of the second subset of the TF resources basedon the received second TPC indicator.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receivetransmission power muting information associated with the one or more TFresources to be muted such that the muting of the one or more TFresources is in accordance with the received transmission power mutinginformation.

In certain representative embodiments, the received transmission powermuting information may be any of: (1) offset power informationassociated with the one or more TF resources indicating an offset fromthe current transmission power of the one or more TF resources; and/or(2) differential power information associated with the one or more TFresources indicating one or more differences between the transmissionpower of the one or more TF resources and other TF resources in asubframe.

In certain representative embodiments, the communication in the firstdirection may be a communication in a UL direction and the communicationin the second direction may be a communication in a DL direction. Forexample, for a wireless mobile terminal, the wires mobile terminal maytransmit in the UL direction and may receive in the DL direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may thecommunication in the first direction may be a communication in a DLdirection and the communication in the second direction may be acommunication in a UL direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU is any of: a mobileterminal, a network access point, an eNB, a HeNB, a Node B or a HNB,among others.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive anindication or report that any of: one or more RSs, one or more controlchannels, one or more resource elements (REs) and/or one or more RBs inthe communication in the second direction are a priority

In certain representative embodiments, The WTRU 102 may determine acorresponding TF location or TF locations associated with the one ormore TF resources in the communication in the first direction to be mutebased on the indication such that the muting of the one or more TFresources is at the corresponding TF location or TF locations for thecommunication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive theindication or the report (e.g., of the priorities) in the DCI.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive achannel index indicating a priority order for channels for communicationin the first and/or second directions.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive anindicator indicating one or more subframes for the WTRU 102 to operatein full duplex mode.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may selectivelyoperate in full duplex mode in the indicated one or more subframes suchthat the one or more subframes are configured for simultaneoustransmission and reception of radio frequency (RF) signals.

In certain representative embodiments, whether a WTRU 102 operates infull duplex mode and/or the number of subframes of a WTRU 102 operatingin full duplex mode is independent of the distance of the WTRU 102 to aNAP.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute one or moreTF resources to reduce or substantially eliminate transmit/receive SINTFfrom the WTRU 102 and/or NINTF for the WTRU 102 among the WTRU 102 andone or more other devices.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may shorten one ormore subframes to reduce or substantially eliminate transmit/receiveSINTF from the WTRU 102 and/or NINTF for the WTRU 102 among the WTRU 102and one or more other devices.

In certain representative embodiments, the muting of the one or more TFresources may be based on one or more TF locations of a channel forcommunication in the second direction and/or one or more TF locations ofa RS to be communicated in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the RS to be communicated in thesecond direction may include any of: (1) a PSS and/or a SSS), (2) PBCH,(3) a DL CRS 630 and/or (4) a DM-RS.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determinewhether a subframe is potentially a SINTF subframe and/or potentially aNINTF subframe, as a determined result such that the WTRU 102 may mutethe one or more TF resources is in accordance with the determinedresult.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may establish asupportable SINTF level (SIL) indicating a level of signal interferencesupportable for full duplex operations.

In certain representative embodiments the WTRU 102 may controltransmission power of the one or more TF resources so that a SIL doesnot exceed an interference level in accordance with the supportable SIL.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may report to anetwork resource any of: (1) a SINTF level (SIL); (2) a supportable SIL;(3) a difference between the SIL and the supportable SIL; (4) a maximumtransmission power; (5) a maximum full duplex single carrier (FDSC)transmission power in the first direction for the WTRU 102 as a whole;(6) a maximum full duplex single carrier (FDSC) transmission power inthe first direction for one or more individual or groups of channels inthe first direction; (7) a transmission power for the WTRU 102 as awhole; (8) a transmission power for one or more individual or groups ofchannels in the first direction; (9) a difference between a transmissionpower and a maximum FDSC power in the first direction; (10) anindication as to whether the SIL is more than a threshold below thesupportable SIL; and/or (11) an indication that the supportable SIL hasbeen exceeded.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may set thesupportable SIL as a function of any of: (1) a full duplex singlecarrier (FDSC) frequency of transmission/reception; (2) an actualfrequency of transmission/reception; (3) a number and/or frequencylocation of RBs; (4) a number and/or frequency location of the RBs ofthe transmission/reception; (5) properties of the FDSC; (6) a relativefrequency location of the RBs and/or REs for WTRUtransmission/reception; (7) a relative frequency location of the RBsand/or the REs, which are allocated for WTRU transmission/reception; (8)a number of WTRU antennas used for transmission/reception; (9) networkresource transmission parameters; (10) a pathloss; (11) a channel typeand/or types of the transmission/reception; (12) a type of RS that isused for transmission/reception; (13) an internal coupling loss of theWTRU 102; (14) a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) and/or a transportblock size (TBS) to be applied; and/or (15) a quality criterion attachedto a transmission.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determinewhether a subframe is used for MBSFN operations, as a determined resultsuch that muting of the one or more TF resources is in accordance withthe determined result.

In certain representative embodiments, the priority signaling mayinclude any of: (1) a DL (DL) synchronization channel; (2) a DLbroadcast channel; (3) a DL RS, (4) a DL control channel; (5) a ULcontrol channel; and/or (6) a UL RS.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may map a signal toa plurality of TF resources including the one or more TF resources to bemuted and the WTRU 102 may puncture the mapped TF resources at TFlocations associated with the one or more TF resources.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may rate-match toavoid mapping a plurality of TF resources at TF locations associatedwith the one or more TF resources to be muted.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may be controlled orconfigured to mute the one or more TF resources for communication in thefirst direction via messaging with a network resource or entity.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determine arelative priority of a first signal for communication in the firstdirection relative to a second signal for communication in the seconddirection based on at least the information associated with thecommunication in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may selectively mutethe one or more TF resources of a plurality of TF resources forcommunication in the first direction based on the determined relativepriority.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determine arelative priority of the first and second signals correspond torespective ones of TF locations or to each TF location associated withthe plurality of TF resources and may mute a respective TF resourceresponsive to the relative priority (e.g., determined relative priority)of the first signal at a corresponding TF location being lower than thesecond signal at the same corresponding TF location.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute performsubframe shortening to reduce interference levels.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute of one ormore TF resources to reduce interference levels.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may dynamically orsemi-statically configure a number of symbols of a region of TFresources in the second direction and may perform the muting of the onemore TF resources in accordance with the configured number of thesymbols of the region of TF resources for the communication in thesecond direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive anindication of a starting symbol 760 associated with a subframe forcommunication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute one or moresymbols of the subframe that are to be communicated in the firstdirection located at a time prior to a time indicated by the startingsymbol 760.

In certain representative embodiments, the indication of the startingsymbol 760 may be expressly provided in signaling to the WTRU 102 orimplicit based on characteristics of information received by the WTRU102.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute of the oneor more TF resources conditioned on any of: (1) a transmission power inthe second direction being higher than a threshold; (2) a TBS of the oneor more TF resources exceeding a threshold; (3) a MCS of the one or moreTF resources exceeding a threshold; and/or (4) a redundancy version ofthe one or more TF resources exceeding a threshold.

In certain representative embodiments, the one or more TF resources maybe a subset of a subframe.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may transmit mutedTF resources or a subset of the muted TF resources in one or moredifferent parts of the subframe for communication in the firstdirection.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may time and/orfrequency shift the TF resources to be muted or instead of muting theseTF resources for communication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, The WTRU 102 may condition themuting of the one or more TF resources on the one or more TF resourcesbeing located in any of: (1) one or more particular TF locations; (2)one or more TF locations in a center portion of a frequency band; (3)one or more TF locations in an edge portion of the frequency band; (4) aparticular subframe; (5) a subframe relative to signaling or anindication in an earlier subframe; (6) a particular symbol; and/or (7) aparticular symbol relative to signaling or an indication in an earliersymbol.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may apply a zerotransmission power, a low transmission power and/or an ABS, as anapplied transmission power, to respective ones of TF resources in thefirst direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may measure aninterference level for the second direction at TF locations associatedwith the applied transmission power at the respective ones of the TFresources.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determine one ormore priorities for the one or more TF resources associated with thecommunication in the first direction based on any of: (1) Quality ofService (QoS) parameters for one or more logical channels associatedwith the one or more TF resources; (2) a number of retransmissionsassociated with respective ones of the one or more TF resources for thecommunication in the first direction; and/or (3) whether respective onesof the one or more TF resources are for a retransmission of thecommunication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102, from receivedinformation, may determine or detect one or more priorities associatedwith TF resources at TF locations for communication in the seconddirection that correspond to the one or more TF resources associatedwith the communication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments the TF muting, the symbol mutingand/or subframe shortening are based on a relative prior of the TFresources associated with a corresponding TF location for thecommunication in the first direction and for the communication in thesecond direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive, detect,obtain or determine the information associated with the communication inthe second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may obtain any of: apriority or a relative priority of signaling, of channels, of resources,of Resource Elements (REs), of Resource Blocks and/or of symbols and/ora list, an ordered list or an indication of priority signaling, ofpriority channels, of priority resources, of priority Resource Elements(REs), of priority Resource Blocks and/or of priority symbols.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive or setone or more subframes that are to include Full Duplex Radio Resources(FDRR).

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may configure one ora plurality of subframes of the set subframes as one or more MBSFNsubframes.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may adjusttransmission power levels between or among subsets of the TF resourcesassociated with the communication in the first direction to reduce orsubstantially eliminate interference to the communication in the seconddirection.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may reduce a powerlevel to a zero power level or a non-zero power level which issufficient to enable the communication in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may configure theWTRU 102 to apply any of: respectively different power control loops,respectively different power control offsets, respectively differentPCMAX values and/or respectively different P_(CMAX,c) values fordifferent TF resources associated with different TF regions.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may adjust aModulation Coding Scheme (MCS) level of the first subset of the TFresources to any of: (1) a lower MCS level and/or (2) a lowest MCSlevel.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive, in DCI,a first MCS level for a first subset of a plurality of TF resources anda second MCS level for a second subset of the plurality of TF resources.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may set atransmission power level of the first subset of the TF resources to areduced level relative to a transmission power level of the secondsubset of the TF resources based on the received first and second MCSlevels.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may set a MCS levelof the first subset of the TF resources to the first MCS level and a MCSlevel of the second subset of the TF resources to the second MCS levelbased on the received first and second MCS levels.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive mutinginformation related to power control that is associated with the one ormore TF resources to be muted and the muting of the one or more TFresources may be in accordance with the received muting informationrelated to the power control.

In certain representative embodiments, the received muting informationrelated to power control may be any of: (1) offset power informationassociated with the one or more TF resources indicating an offset fromthe current transmission power of the one or more TF resources; and/or(2) differential power information associated with the one or more TFresources indicating one or more differences between the transmissionpower of the one or more TF resources and other TF resources in asubframe.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may be any of amobile terminal, a network access point (NAP), an evolved Node B (eNB)160, a Home eNB (HeNB), a Node B, a Home Node B (HNB), or a relay node.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive,determine, or obtain a priority or a relative priority of any of: one ormore RSs, one or more control channels, one or more REs and/or one ormore RBs for the communication in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determine acorresponding TF location or TF locations associated with the one ormore TF resources for the communication in the first direction to bemuted based on the priority or the relative priority and the muting mayinclude muting the one or more TF resources at the corresponding TFlocation or TF locations for the communication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive thepriority or relative priority in an indication in DCI.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive anindicator indicating one or more subframes for the WTRU to use a fullduplex operation.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may selectively usethe full duplex operation in the indicated one or more subframes suchthat the one or more subframes may be configured for simultaneoustransmission and reception of radio frequency (RF) signals.

In certain representative embodiments, an operation and/or number ofsubframes of the WTRU 102 using the full duplex operation may beindependent of a distance of the WTRU 102 to its network access point.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute of the oneor more TF resources based on one or more TF locations of a signalcommunicated in the second direction, one or more TF locations of achannel for communication in the second direction and/or one or more TFlocations of a RS to be communicated in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the signal, the RS or the channelmay include any of: (1) primary and secondary synchronization signals(PSS/SSS), (2) a physical broadcast channel (PBCH), (3) a DL CRS 630and/or (4) a Demodulation-RS (DM-RS).

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determine arelative priority of a first signal for communication in the firstdirection relative to a second signal for communication in the seconddirection based on at least the information associated with thecommunication in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may selectively mutethe one or more TF resources of a plurality of TF resources forcommunication in the first direction based on the determined relativepriority.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may dynamically orsemi-statically configure a number of symbols of a subframe forcommunication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determine astarting symbol 760 associated with the subframe for communication inthe first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute one or moresymbols of the subframe that are to be communicated in the firstdirection located at a time prior to a time of the starting symbol 760.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute the one ormore TF resources conditioned on any of: (1) a transmission power in thefirst direction being higher than a threshold; (2) a Transport BlockSize (TBS) of the one or more TF resources exceeding a threshold; (3) aModulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) of the one or more TF resourcesexceeding a threshold; and/or (4) a redundancy version of the one ormore TF resources exceeding a threshold.

In certain representative embodiments, the one or more TF resources maybe a subset of a subframe, and the WTRU 102 may transmit one or moresignals or RSs associated with the muted TF resources or a subset of themuted TF resources in one or more different parts of the subframe forcommunication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may time and/orfrequency shift one or more signals or one or more RSs associated withthe muted TF resources for communication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may apply zerotransmission power, low transmission power and/or an ABS, as an appliedtransmission power reduction, to one or a plurality of TF resources inthe first direction

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may measure aninterference level for the second direction at TF locations associatedwith the applied TF resources.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determine one ormore priorities for the one or more TF resources associated with thecommunication in the first direction based on any of: (1) Quality ofService (QoS) parameters for one or more logical channels associatedwith the one or more TF resources; (2) a number of retransmissionsassociated with one or a plurality of the one or more TF resources forthe communication in the first direction; and/or (3) whether one or aplurality of the one or more TF resources are for a retransmission ofthe communication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determine ordetect one or more priorities associated with TF resources at TFlocations for communication in the second direction that correspond tothe one or more TF resources associated with the communication in thefirst direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may, the TF muting,the symbol muting and/or the subframe shortening may be based on arelative priority of the TF resources associated with a corresponding TFlocation for the communication in the first direction and thecommunication in the second direction.

FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating another representative method 2300implemented in a WTRU 102 using time-frequency (TF) resources forcommunications in first and second directions.

Referring to FIG. 23 , the representative method 2300 may include, atblock 2310, the WTRU 102 being configured for muting of one or more TFresources for communication in the first direction based on informationassociated with a communication in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive thecommunication in the second direction and may detect or determine theinformation associated with the communication in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may obtain any of: alist, an ordered list or an indication of priority signaling, ofpriority channels, of priority resources, of priority Resource Elements(REs), of priority Resource Blocks and/or priority symbols.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may be configured toreceive at least a portion of the communication in the second directionwhile transmitting at least a portion of the communication in the firstdirection.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may establish timeintervals in which the communications in the first and seconddirections: (1) overlap in frequency and/or (2) a first frequency or afirst frequency band of the communication in the first direction iswithin a threshold of a second frequency or a second frequency band ofthe communication in the second direction. For example, the WTRU 102 maybe configured or may configure itself to enable FDR operations.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may set one or moresubframes that are to include Full Duplex Resources (FDR). For example,the WTRU 102 may set the FDR subframes based on information from aNetwork Access Point (NAP) (e.g., a HeNB or eNB 160 or other accesspoint device).

In certain representative embodiments the WTRU 102 may set the one ormore subframe as one or more MBSFN subframes.

In certain representative embodiments, the TF resources may include anyof: (1) one or more Resource Elements (REs), one or more Resource Blocks(RBs), and/or (3) one or more symbols.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute the one ormore TF resources via any of: (1) a blanking operation; (2) a puncturingoperation; (3) a rate matching operation; and/or (4) a transmissionpower control operation.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may adjusttransmission power levels between or among subsets of the TF resourcesassociated with the communication in the first direction to reduce orsubstantially eliminate interference to the communication in the seconddirection that is being concurrently communicated to the WTRU 102.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may be configured toapply any of: (1) respectively different power control loops, (2)respectively different power control offsets and/or (3) respectivelydifferent P_(CMAX) values for different TF resources associated withdifferent TF regions based on a grant or DCI.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may set atransmission power level of a first subset of the TF resources to areduced level relative to a transmission power level of a second subsetof the TF resources.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may adjust amodulation order of the first subset of the TF resources to any of: (1)a reduced modulation order and/or (2) a lowest modulation order.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may apply any of:(1) a fixed rank indicated from the DCI for the first subset of TFresources; and/or (2) a first rank indicated from the DCI for the firstsubset of TF resources that is smaller than a second rank for the secondsubset of TF resources.

In certain representative embodiments, the first rank may be indicatedby an offset in the DCI.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive, in theDCI, a first modulation order for a first subset of a plurality of TFresources and a second modulation order for a second subset of theplurality of TF resources.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may set a modulationorder of the first subset of the TF resources to the first modulationorder and a modulation order of the second subset of TF resources to thesecond modulation order based on the received DCI.

In certain representative embodiments, the reduced level for setting thetransmission power level of the first subset of the TF resources may bea zero power level or a non-zero power level which enables thecommunication in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive (e.g.,in DCI) a first transmission power control (TPC) indicator associatedwith the first subset of the TF resources and a second TPC indicatorassociated with the second subset of the TF resources.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may adjust atransmission power level of the first subset of the TF resources basedon the received first TPC indicator in the DCI and may adjust atransmission power level of the second subset of the TF resources basedon the received second TPC indicator.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receivetransmission power muting information associated with the one or more TFresources to be muted such that the muting of the one or more TFresources is in accordance with the received transmission power mutinginformation.

In certain representative embodiments, the received transmission powermuting information may be any of (1) offset power information associatedwith the one or more TF resources indicating an offset from the currenttransmission power of the one or more TF resources; and/or (2)differential power information associated with the one or more TFresources indicating one or more differences between the transmissionpower of the one or more TF resources and other TF resources in asubframe.

In certain representative embodiments, the communication in the firstdirection may be a communication in a UL direction and the communicationin the second direction may be a communication in a DL direction. Forexample, for a wireless mobile terminal, the wires mobile terminal maytransmit in the UL direction and may receive in the DL direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may thecommunication in the first direction may be a communication in a DLdirection and the communication in the second direction may be acommunication in a UL direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 is any of: a mobileterminal, a network access point, an evolved Node B (HeNB), Home eNB(HeNB), a Node B or a Home Node B (HNB), among others.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive anindication or report that any of: one or more RSs, one or more controlchannels, one or more REs and/or one or more RBs in the communication inthe second direction are a priority

In certain representative embodiments, The WTRU 102 may determine acorresponding TF location or TF locations associated with the one ormore TF resources in the communication in the first direction to be mutebased on the indication such that the muting of the one or more TFresources is at the corresponding TF location or TF locations for thecommunication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive theindication or the report (e.g., of the priorities) in the DCI.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive achannel index indicating a priority order for channels for communicationin the first and/or second directions.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive anindicator indicating one or more subframes for the WTRU 102 to operatein full duplex mode.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may selectivelyoperate in full duplex mode in the indicated one or more subframes suchthat the one or more subframes are configured for simultaneoustransmission and reception of radio frequency (RF) signals.

In certain representative embodiments, whether a WTRU 102 operates infull duplex mode and/or the number of subframes of a WTRU 102 operatingin full duplex mode is independent of the distance of the WTRU 102 to aNAP.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute one or moreTF resources to reduce or substantially eliminate transmit/receive SINTFfrom the WTRU 102 and/or NINTF for the WTRU 102 among the WTRU 102 andone or more other devices.

In certain representative embodiments, the muting of the one or more TFresources may be based on one or more TF locations of a channel forcommunication in the second direction and/or one or more TF locations ofa RS to be communicated in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the RS to be communicated in thesecond direction may include any of: (1) a PSS and/or a SSS, (2) a PBCH,(3) a DL CRS 630 and/or (4) a DM-RS.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determinewhether a subframe is potentially a SINTF subframe and/or potentially aNINTF subframe, as a determined result such that the WTRU 102 may mutethe one or more TF resources is in accordance with the determinedresult.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may establish asupportable SINTF level (SIL) indicating a level of signal interferencesupportable for full duplex operations.

In certain representative embodiments the WTRU 102 may controltransmission power of the one or more TF resources so that a SIL doesnot exceed an interference level in accordance with the supportable SIL.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may report to anetwork resource any of: (1) a SINTF level (SIL); (2) a supportable SIL;(3) a difference between the SIL and the supportable SIL; (4) a maximumtransmission power; (5) a maximum full duplex single carrier (FDSC)transmission power in the first direction for the WTRU 102 as a whole;(6) a maximum full duplex single carrier (FDSC) transmission power inthe first direction for one or more individual or groups of channels inthe first direction; (7) a transmission power for the WTRU 102 as awhole; (8) a transmission power for one or more individual or groups ofchannels in the first direction; (9) a difference between a transmissionpower and a maximum FDSC power in the first direction; (10) anindication as to whether the SIL is more than a threshold below thesupportable SIL; and/or (11) an indication that the supportable SIL hasbeen exceeded.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may set thesupportable SIL as a function of any of: (1) a full duplex singlecarrier (FDSC) frequency of transmission/reception; (2) an actualfrequency of transmission/reception; (3) a number and/or frequencylocation of RBs (4) a number and/or frequency location of the RBs of thetransmission/reception; (5) properties of the FDSC; (6) a relativefrequency location of the RBs and/or REs for WTRUtransmission/reception; (7) a relative frequency location of the RBsand/or the REs, which are allocated for WTRU transmission/reception; (8)a number of WTRU antennas used for transmission/reception; (9) networkresource transmission parameters; (10) a pathloss; (11) a channel typeand/or types of the transmission/reception; (12) a type of RS that isused for transmission/reception; (13) an internal coupling loss of theWTRU 102; (14) a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) and/or a transportblock size (TBS) to be applied; and/or (15) a quality criterion attachedto a transmission.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determinewhether a subframe is used for MBSFN operations, as a determined resultsuch that muting of the one or more TF resources is in accordance withthe determined result.

In certain representative embodiments, the priority signaling mayinclude any of (1) a DL synchronization channel; (2) a DL broadcastchannel; (3) a DL RS, (4) a DL control channel; (5) a UL controlchannel; and/or (6) a UL RS.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may map a signal toa plurality of TF resources including the one or more TF resources to bemuted and the WTRU 102 may puncture the mapped TF resources at TFlocations associated with the one or more TF resources.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may rate-match toavoid mapping a plurality of TF resources at TF locations associatedwith the one or more TF resources to be muted.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may be controlled orconfigured to mute the one or more TF resources for communication in thefirst direction via messaging with a network resource or entity.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determine arelative priority of a first signal for communication in the firstdirection relative to a second signal for communication in the seconddirection based on at least the information associated with thecommunication in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may selectively mutethe one or more TF resources of a plurality of TF resources forcommunication in the first direction based on the determined relativepriority.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determine arelative priority of the first and second signals correspond torespective ones of TF locations or to each TF location associated withthe plurality of TF resources and may mute a respective TF resourceresponsive to the relative priority (e.g., determined relative priority)of the first signal at a corresponding TF location being lower than thesecond signal at the same corresponding TF location.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute performsubframe shortening to reduce interference levels.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute of one ormore TF resources to reduce interference levels.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may dynamically orsemi-statically configure a number of symbols of a region of TFresources in the second direction and may perform the muting of the onemore TF resources in accordance with the configured number of thesymbols of the region of TF resources for the communication in thesecond direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive anindication of a starting symbol 760 associated with a subframe forcommunication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute one or moresymbols of the subframe that are to be communicated in the firstdirection located at a time prior to a time indicated by the startingsymbol 760.

In certain representative embodiments, the indication of the startingsymbol 760 may be expressly provided in signaling to the WTRU 102 orimplicit based on characteristics of information received by the WTRU102.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute of the oneor more TF resources conditioned on any of: (1) a transmission power inthe second direction being higher than a threshold; (2) a TBS of the oneor more TF resources exceeding a threshold; (3) a MCS of the one or moreTF resources exceeding a threshold; and/or (4) a redundancy version ofthe one or more TF resources exceeding a threshold.

In certain representative embodiments, the one or more TF resources maybe a subset of a subframe.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may transmit mutedTF resources or a subset of the muted TF resources in one or moredifferent parts of the subframe for communication in the firstdirection.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may time and/orfrequency shift the TF resources to be muted or instead of muting theseTF resources for communication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, The WTRU 102 may condition themuting of the one or more TF resources on the one or more TF resourcesbeing located in any of: (1) one or more particular TF locations; (2)one or more TF locations in a center portion of a frequency band; (3)one or more TF locations in an edge portion of the frequency band; (4) aparticular subframe; (5) a subframe relative to signaling or anindication in an earlier subframe; (6) a particular symbol; and/or (7) aparticular symbol relative to signaling or an indication in an earliersymbol.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may apply a zerotransmission power, a low transmission power and/or an ABS, as anapplied transmission power, to respective ones of TF resources in thefirst direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may measure aninterference level for the second direction at TF locations associatedwith the applied transmission power at the respective ones of the TFresources.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determine one ormore priorities for the one or more TF resources associated with thecommunication in the first direction based on any of: (1) Quality ofService (QoS) parameters for one or more logical channels associatedwith the one or more TF resources; (2) a number of retransmissionsassociated with respective ones of the one or more TF resources for thecommunication in the first direction; and/or (3) whether respective onesof the one or more TF resources are for a retransmission of thecommunication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102, from receivedinformation, may determine or detect one or more priorities associatedwith TF resources at TF locations for communication in the seconddirection that correspond to the one or more TF resources associatedwith the communication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments the TF muting, the symbol mutingand/or subframe shortening are based on a relative prior of the TFresources associated with a corresponding TF location for thecommunication in the first direction and for the communication in thesecond direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive, detect,obtain or determine the information associated with the communication inthe second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may obtain any of: apriority or a relative priority of signaling, of channels, of resources,of Resource Elements (REs), of Resource Blocks and/or of symbols and/ora list, an ordered list or an indication of priority signaling, ofpriority channels, of priority resources, of priority Resource Elements(REs), of priority Resource Blocks and/or of priority symbols.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive or setone or more subframes that are to include Full Duplex Radio Resources(FDRR).

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may configure one ora plurality of subframes of the set subframes as one or more MBSFNsubframes.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may adjusttransmission power levels between or among subsets of the TF resourcesassociated with the communication in the first direction to reduce orsubstantially eliminate interference to the communication in the seconddirection.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may reduce a powerlevel to a zero power level or a non-zero power level which issufficient to enable the communication in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may configure theWTRU 102 to apply any of: respectively different power control loops,respectively different power control offsets, respectively differentPCMAX values and/or respectively different P_(CMAX,c) values fordifferent TF resources associated with different TF regions.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may adjust aModulation Coding Scheme (MCS) level of the first subset of the TFresources to any of: (1) a lower MCS level and/or (2) a lowest MCSlevel.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive, in theDCI, a first MCS level for a first subset of a plurality of TF resourcesand a second MCS level for a second subset of the plurality of TFresources.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may set atransmission power level of the first subset of the TF resources to areduced level relative to a transmission power level of the secondsubset of the TF resources based on the received first and second MCSlevels.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may set a MCS levelof the first subset of the TF resources to the first MCS level and a MCSlevel of the second subset of the TF resources to the second MCS levelbased on the received first and second MCS levels.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive mutinginformation related to power control that is associated with the one ormore TF resources to be muted and the muting of the one or more TFresources may be in accordance with the received muting informationrelated to the power control.

In certain representative embodiments, the received muting informationrelated to power control may be any of (1) offset power informationassociated with the one or more TF resources indicating an offset fromthe current transmission power of the one or more TF resources; and/or(2) differential power information associated with the one or more TFresources indicating one or more differences between the transmissionpower of the one or more TF resources and other TF resources in asubframe.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may be any of: amobile terminal, a network access point (NAP), an evolved Node B (eNB),a Home eNB (HeNB), a Node B, a Home Node B (HNB), or a relay node.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive,determine, or obtain a priority or a relative priority of any of: one ormore RSs, one or more control channels, one or more REs and/or one ormore RBs for the communication in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determine acorresponding TF location or TF locations associated with the one ormore TF resources for the communication in the first direction to bemuted based on the priority or the relative priority and the muting mayinclude muting the one or more TF resources at the corresponding TFlocation or TF locations for the communication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive thepriority or relative priority in an indication in the DCI.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive anindicator indicating one or more subframes for the WTRU 102 to use afull duplex operation.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may selectively usethe full duplex operation in the indicated one or more subframes suchthat the one or more subframes may be configured for simultaneoustransmission and reception of radio frequency (RF) signals.

In certain representative embodiments, an operation and/or number ofsubframes of the WTRU 102 using the full duplex operation may beindependent of a distance of the WTRU 102 to its network access point.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute of the oneor more TF resources based on one or more TF locations of a signalcommunicated in the second direction, one or more TF locations of achannel for communication in the second direction and/or one or more TFlocations of a RS to be communicated in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the signal, the RS or the channelmay include any of: (1) a PSS and/or a SSS, (2) PBCH, (3) a DL CRS 630and/or (4) a DM-RS.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determine arelative priority of a first signal for communication in the firstdirection relative to a second signal for communication in the seconddirection based on at least the information associated with thecommunication in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may selectively mutethe one or more TF resources of a plurality of TF resources forcommunication in the first direction based on the determined relativepriority.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may dynamically orsemi-statically configure a number of symbols of a subframe forcommunication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determine astarting symbol 760 associated with the subframe for communication inthe first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute one or moresymbols of the subframe that are to be communicated in the firstdirection located at a time prior to a time of the starting symbol 760.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute the one ormore TF resources conditioned on any of: (1) a transmission power in thefirst direction being higher than a threshold; (2) a Transport BlockSize (TBS) of the one or more TF resources exceeding a threshold; (3) aModulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) of the one or more TF resourcesexceeding a threshold; and/or (4) a redundancy version of the one ormore TF resources exceeding a threshold.

In certain representative embodiments, the one or more TF resources maybe a subset of a subframe, and the WTRU 102 may transmit one or moresignals or RSs associated with the muted TF resources or a subset of themuted TF resources in one or more different parts of the subframe forcommunication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may time and/orfrequency shift one or more signals or one or more RSs associated withthe muted TF resources for communication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may apply zerotransmission power, low transmission power and/or an ABS, as an appliedtransmission power reduction, to one or a plurality of TF resources inthe first direction

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may measure aninterference level for the second direction at TF locations associatedwith the applied TF resources.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determine one ormore priorities for the one or more TF resources associated with thecommunication in the first direction based on any of: (1) Quality ofService (QoS) parameters for one or more logical channels associatedwith the one or more TF resources; (2) a number of retransmissionsassociated with one or a plurality of the one or more TF resources forthe communication in the first direction; and/or (3) whether one or aplurality of the one or more TF resources are for a retransmission ofthe communication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may determine ordetect one or more priorities associated with TF resources at TFlocations for communication in the second direction that correspond tothe one or more TF resources associated with the communication in thefirst direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may, the TF muting,the symbol muting and/or the subframe shortening may be based on arelative priority of the TF resources associated with a corresponding TFlocation for the communication in the first direction and thecommunication in the second direction.

FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an additional representative method2400 implemented in a WTRU 102 using one or a plurality of subframes forcommunications in first and second directions.

Referring to FIG. 24 , the representative method 2400 may include, atblock 2410, the WTRU 102 being configured for shortening of a subframefor communication in the first direction based on information associatedwith a communication in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive thecommunication in the second direction and may detect or determine theinformation associated with the communication in the second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may obtain any of: alist, an ordered list or an indication of priority signaling, ofpriority channels, of priority resources, of priority Resource Elements(REs), of priority Resource Blocks and/or priority symbols.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may be configured toreceive at least a portion of the communication in the second directionwhile transmitting at least a portion of the communication in the firstdirection.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may establish timeintervals in which the communications in the first and seconddirections: (1) overlap in frequency and/or (2) a first frequency or afirst frequency band of the communication in the first direction iswithin a threshold of a second frequency or a second frequency band ofthe communication in the second direction. For example, the WTRU 102 maybe configured or may configure itself to enable FDR operations.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may set one or moresubframes that are to include Full Duplex Resources (FDR). For example,the WTRU 102 may set the FDR subframes based on information from aNetwork Access Point (NAP) (e.g., a HeNB or eNB 160 or other accesspoint device).

In certain representative embodiments the WTRU 102 may set the one ormore subframe as one or more MBSFN subframes.

In certain representative embodiments, the shortened subframe mayinclude one or more symbols which are muted.

In certain representative embodiments, the communication in the firstdirection may be a communication in a UL direction and the communicationin the second direction may be a communication in a DL direction. Forexample, for a wireless mobile terminal, the wires mobile terminal maytransmit in the UL direction and may receive in the DL direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive anindicator indicating one or more subframes for the WTRU 102 to operatein full duplex mode.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may selectivelyoperate in full duplex mode in the indicated one or more subframes suchthat the one or more subframes are configured for simultaneoustransmission and reception of radio frequency (RF) signals.

In certain representative embodiments, whether a WTRU 102 operates infull duplex mode and/or the number of subframes of a WTRU 102 operatingin full duplex mode is independent of the distance of the WTRU 102 to aNAP.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may shorten one ormore subframes to reduce or substantially eliminate transmit/receiveSINTF from the WTRU 102 and/or NINTF for the WTRU 102 among the WTRU 102and one or more other devices.

In certain representative embodiments, the RS to be communicated in thesecond direction may include any of: (1) primary and secondarysynchronization signals (PSS/SSS), (2) a physical broadcast channel(PBCH), (3) a DL CRS 630 and/or (4) a Demodulation-RS (DM-RS).

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may report to anetwork resource any of: (1) a SINTF level (SIL); (2) a supportable SIL;(3) a difference between the SIL and the supportable SIL; (4) a maximumtransmission power; (5) a maximum full duplex single carrier (FDSC)transmission power in the first direction for the WTRU 102 as a whole;(6) a maximum full duplex single carrier (FDSC) transmission power inthe first direction for one or more individual or groups of channels inthe first direction; (7) a transmission power for the WTRU 102 as awhole; (8) a transmission power for one or more individual or groups ofchannels in the first direction; (9) a difference between a transmissionpower and a maximum FDSC power in the first direction; (10) anindication as to whether the SIL is more than a threshold below thesupportable SIL; and/or (11) an indication that the supportable SIL hasbeen exceeded.

In certain representative embodiments, the priority signaling mayinclude any of: (1) a DL synchronization channel; (2) a DL broadcastchannel; (3) a DL RS, (4) a DL control channel; (5) a UL controlchannel; and/or (6) a UL RS.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may mute of one ormore TF resources to reduce interference levels.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may apply a zerotransmission power, a low transmission power and/or an ABS, as anapplied transmission power, to respective ones of TF resources in thefirst direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may measure aninterference level for the second direction at TF locations associatedwith the applied transmission power at the respective ones of the TFresources.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102, from receivedinformation, may determine or detect one or more priorities associatedwith TF resources at TF locations for communication in the seconddirection that correspond to the one or more TF resources associatedwith the communication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments the TF muting, the symbol mutingand/or subframe shortening are based on a relative prior of the TFresources associated with a corresponding TF location for thecommunication in the first direction and for the communication in thesecond direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive, detect,obtain or determine the information associated with the communication inthe second direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may obtain any of: apriority or a relative priority of signaling, of channels, of resources,of Resource Elements (REs), of Resource Blocks and/or of symbols and/ora list, an ordered list or an indication of priority signaling, ofpriority channels, of priority resources, of priority Resource Elements(REs), of priority Resource Blocks and/or of priority symbols.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive or setone or more subframes that arc to include Full Duplex Radio Resources(FDRR).

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may configure one ora plurality of subframes of the set subframes as one or more MBSFNsubframes.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may receive anindicator indicating one or more subframes for the WTRU 102 to use afull duplex operation.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may selectively usethe full duplex operation in the indicated one or more subframes suchthat the one or more subframes may be configured for simultaneoustransmission and reception of radio frequency (RF) signals.

In certain representative embodiments, an operation and/or number ofsubframes of the WTRU 102 using the full duplex operation may beindependent of a distance of the WTRU 102 to its network access point.

FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a further representative method 2500implemented in a WTRU 102 using time-frequency (TF) resources in firstand second directions.

Referring to FIG. 25 , at block 2510, the WTRU 102 may obtaininformation associated with communication in the second directionindicating a SINTF condition, a potential SINTF condition, a neighboringinterference condition or a potential neighboring interferencecondition. At block 2520, the WTRU 102 may configure the WTRU 102 (e.g.,itself or a WTRU) for an interference avoiding TF resource structure oncondition that the information associated with communication in thesecond direction indicates any of: the self-interference condition, thepotential SINTF condition, the neighboring interference condition and/orthe potential neighboring interference condition the self-interferencecondition or the neighboring interference condition.

In certain representative embodiments, the SINTF condition may indicateinterference between TF resources for transmission in the firstdirection from the WTRU 102 and priority TF resources for reception inthe second direction by the WTRU 102.

In certain representative embodiments, the neighboring interferencecondition may indicate interference between or among TF resources fortransmission in the first direction from the WTRU 102 and priority TFresources from one or more other WTRUs 102 for interference (e.g.,reception) in the second direction by the WTRU 102.

In certain representative embodiments, the SINTF condition may indicateinterference between TF resources for transmission in the firstdirection from the WTRU 102 and priority TF resources for reception inthe second direction by the WTRU 102 and the neighboring interferencecondition may indicate interference between or among TF resources fortransmission in the first direction from the WTRU 102 and priority TFresources for reception in the second direction by one or more otherWTRUs 102.

In certain representative embodiments, the WTRU 102 may combination anyof the RE muting, symbol muting and/or subframe shortening procedures ormethods to further reduce the effect of interference.

FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a representative method 2600implemented Network Access Point (NAP) in communication with a WTRU 102using time-frequency (TF) resources for communications in first andsecond directions.

Referring to FIG. 26 , at block 2610, the NAP may determine whether toTF mute, symbol mute, and/or subframe shorten a communication in thefirst direction for controlling interference between the communicationin the first direction and a communication in the second direction. Atblock 2620, the NAP may send configuration information for the WTRU 102to TF mute, symbol mute and/or subframe shorten one or more TFresources, one or more symbols and/or one or more subframes forcommunication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send a configurationto the WTRU 102 to enable the WTRU 102 to receive at least a portion ofthe communication in the second direction while transmitting at least aportion of the communication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send an indication ofone or more subframes that are to include Full Duplex Resources (FDR).

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send in a grant orDCI, the configuration information for the WTRU 102 to apply any of: (1)respectively different power control loops, respectively different powercontrol offsets and/or respectively different P_(CMAX) values fordifferent TF resources associated with different TF regions.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send theconfiguration information which may include any of: (1) a fixed rankindicated from DCI for a first subset of TF resources; and/or (2) afirst rank indicated from the DCI for the first subset of TF resourcesthat is smaller than a second rank for a second subset of TF resources.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send the DCI that mayindicate an offset for the first rank from the second rank.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send in the DCI afirst modulation order for a first subset of a plurality of TF resourcesand a second modulation order for a second subset of the plurality of TFresources to set for the WTRU 102 a transmission power level of thefirst subset of the TF resources to a reduced level relative to atransmission power level of the second subset of the TF resources basedon the received first and second modulation orders in the DCI and to seta modulation order of the first subset of the TF resources to the firstmodulation order and a modulation order of the second subset of TFresources to the second modulation order.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send in the DCI afirst transmission power control (TPC) indicator associated with a firstsubset of the TF resources and a second TPC indicator associated with asecond subset of the TF resources to individually adjust a transmissionpower level of the first and second subsets of the TF resources.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send transmissionpower muting information associated with the one or more TF resources tobe muted.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send an indication orreport that any of: one or more RSs, one or more control channels, oneor more REs and/or one or more RBs for the communication in the seconddirection are a priority.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send a channel indexindicating a priority order for channels for communication in the firstand/or second directions.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send an indicatorindicating one or more subframes for the WTRU 102 to operate in fullduplex mode.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may receive from the WTRU102 by the NAP, a report indicating any of: (1) a SINTF level (SIL) ofthe WTRU 102; (2) a supportable SIL of the WTRU 102; (3) a differencebetween the SIL and the supportable SIL; (4) a maximum transmissionpower; (5) a maximum full duplex single carrier (FDSC) transmissionpower in the first direction for the WTRU 102 as a whole; (6) a maximumfull duplex single carrier (FDSC) transmission power in the firstdirection for one or more individual or groups of channels in the firstdirection; (7) a transmission power for the WTRU 102 as a whole; (8) atransmission power for one or more individual or groups of channels inthe first direction; (9) a difference between a transmission power and amaximum FDSC power in the first direction; (10) an indication as towhether the SIL is more than a threshold below the supportable SIL;and/or (11) an indication that the supportable SIL has been exceeded.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send an indication ofa starting symbol 760 associated with a subframe for communication inthe first direction to configure the WTRU 102 for muting one or moresymbols of a subframe that arc to be communicated in the first directionlocated at a time prior to a time indicated by the starting symbol 760.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may determine, set and/orestablish one or more priorities for the one or more TF resourcesassociated with the communication in the first direction based on anyof: (1) Quality of Service (QoS) parameters for one or more logicalchannels associated with the one or more TF resources; (2) a number ofretransmissions associated with respective ones of the one or more TFresources for the communication in the first direction; and/or (3)whether respective ones of the one or more TF resources are for aretransmission of the communication in the first direction.

In certain representative embodiments, the configuration information mayinclude an indication to selectively TF mute, selectively symbol muteand/or selectively subframe shorten the one or more TF resources, theone or more symbols and/or the one or more subframes based on a relativepriority of any of: one or more signals, one or more channels, one ormore RBs, one or more REs and/or one more symbols.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send an indication ofone or more subframes that are to include Full Duplex Radio Resources(FDRR).

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send theconfiguration information to enable the WTRU 102 to apply any of:respectively different power control loops, respectively different powercontrol offsets, respectively different PCMAX values and/or respectivelydifferent P_(CMAX,c) values for different TF resources associated withdifferent TF regions.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send, in DCI, a firstModulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) level for a first subset of aplurality of TF resources and a second MCS level for a second subset ofthe plurality of TF resources for the WTRU 102 to set a transmissionpower level of the first subset of the TF resources to a reduced levelrelative to a transmission power level of the second subset of the TFresources based on the received first and second MCS levels and to set aMCS level of the first subset of the TF resources to the first MCS leveland a MCS level of the second subset of TF resources to the second MCSlevel based on the received first and second MCS levels.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send mutinginformation related to power control associated with the one or more TFresources to be muted.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may send an indicatorindicating one or more subframes for the WTRU 102 to use a full duplexoperation.

In certain representative embodiments, the NAP may determine orestablish one or more priorities for the one or more TF resourcesassociated with the communication in the first direction based on anyof: (1) Quality of Service (QoS) parameters for one or more logicalchannels associated with the one or more TF resources; (2) a number ofretransmissions associated with one or a plurality of the one or more TFresources for the communication in the first direction; and/or (3)whether one or a plurality of the one or more TF resources arc for aretransmission of the communication in the first direction.

Representative Embodiments

In representative embodiment 1, a method implemented in a WirelessTransmit/Receive Unit (WTRU) using time-frequency (TF) resources forcommunications in first and second directions may comprise TF resourcemuting or symbol muting, by the WTRU, one or more TF resources forcommunication in the first direction based on information associatedwith a communication in the second direction or subframe shortening, bythe WTRU, one or more TF resources for communication in the firstdirection based on information associated with a communication in thesecond direction.

In representative embodiment 2, a method implemented in a WirelessTransmit/Receive Unit (WTRU) using time-frequency (TF) resources forcommunication in first and second directions may comprise configuringthe WTRU for muting one or more TF resources for communication in thefirst direction based on information associated with a communication inthe second direction.

In representative embodiment 3, a method implemented in a WirelessTransmit/Receive Unit (WTRU) using a one or a plurality of subframes forcommunications in first and second directions may comprise configuringthe WTRU for shortening of a subframe for communication in the firstdirection based on information associated with a communication in thesecond direction.

In representative embodiment 4, the method of any one of the precedingembodiments may further comprise: receiving, detecting, obtaining ordetermining, by the WTRU, the information associated with thecommunication in the second direction.

In representative embodiment 5, the method of representative embodiment4, wherein the receiving, the detecting, the obtaining or thedetermining of the information associated with the communication in thesecond direction may include obtaining any of: a priority or a relativepriority of signaling, of channels, of resources, of Resource Elements(REs), of Resource Blocks and/or of symbols and/or a list, an orderedlist or an indication of priority signaling, of priority channels, ofpriority resources, of priority Resource Elements (REs), of priorityResource Blocks and/or of priority symbols.

In representative embodiment 6, the method of any one of the precedingrepresentative embodiments may further comprise configuring the WTRU toreceive at least a portion of the communication in the second directionwhile transmitting at least a portion of the communication in the firstdirection.

In representative embodiment 7, the method of representative embodiment6, wherein the configuring of the WTRU to receive at least the portionof the communication in the second direction while transmitting at leastthe portion of the communication in the first direction may includeestablishing time intervals in which the communications in the first andsecond directions: (1) overlap in frequency and/or (2) a first frequencyor a first frequency band of the communication in the first direction iswithin a threshold of a second frequency or a second frequency band ofthe communication in the second direction.

In representative embodiment 8, the method of any one of the precedingrepresentative embodiments, may further comprises receiving or settingone or more subframes that are to include Full Duplex Radio Resources(FDRRs).

In representative embodiment 9, the method of representative embodiment8, wherein the setting of the one or more subframes may includeconfiguring one or a plurality of subframes of the set subframes as oneor more multimedia broadcast multicast service single frequency network(MBSFN) subframes.

In representative embodiment 10, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-9, wherein the one or more TF resources mayinclude any of: (1) one or more Resource Elements (REs), one or moreResource Blocks (RBs), and/or (3) one or more symbols.

In representative embodiment 11, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1, 3-10, wherein the shortened subframe may include one ormore symbols which are muted.

In representative embodiment 12, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-11, wherein the muting of the one or more TFresources may include muting of the one or more TF resources via any of:(1) a blanking operation; (2) a puncturing operation; (3) a ratematching operation; and/or (4) a transmission power control operation.

In representative embodiment 13, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-12, wherein the muting of the one or more TFresources may include adjusting transmission power levels between oramong subsets of the TF resources associated with the communication inthe first direction to reduce or substantially eliminate interference tothe communication in the second direction.

In representative embodiment 14, the method of representative embodiment13, wherein the adjusting of the transmission power level may reduce apower level to a zero power level or a non-zero power level which issufficient to enable the communication in the second direction.

In representative embodiment 15, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-14 may further comprise configuring the WTRU toapply any of: respectively different power control loops, respectivelydifferent power control offsets, respectively different P_(CMAX) valuesand/or respectively different P_(CMAX,c) values for different TFresources associated with different TF regions.

In representative embodiment 16, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-15, wherein the muting of the TF resources mayinclude setting a transmission power level of a first subset of the TFresources to a reduced level relative to a transmission power level of asecond subset of the TF resources.

In representative embodiment 17, the method of representative embodiment16, wherein the setting of the transmission power level may includeadjusting a Modulation Coding Scheme (MCS) level of the first subset ofthe TF resources to any of: (1) a lower MCS level and/or (2) a lowestMCS level.

In representative embodiment 18, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-17, wherein the muting of the one or more TFresources may include: receiving, in downlink control information (DCI),a first MCS level for a first subset of a plurality of TF resources anda second MCS level for a second subset of the plurality of TF resources;setting a transmission power level of the first subset of the TFresources to a reduced level relative to a transmission power level ofthe second subset of the TF resources based on the received first andsecond MCS levels; and setting a MCS level of the first subset of the TFresources to the first MCS level and a MCS level of the second subset ofthe TF resources to the second MCS level based on the received first andsecond MCS levels.

In representative embodiment 19, the method of representative embodiment18, wherein the reduced level may be a zero power level or a non-zeropower level which is sufficient to enable the communication in thesecond direction.

In representative embodiment 20, the method of representative embodiment16 may further comprises: receiving, in downlink control information(DCI), a first transmission power control (TPC) indicator associatedwith the first subset of the TF resources and a second TPC indicatorassociated with the second subset of the TF resources; adjusting thetransmission power level of the first subset of the TF resources basedon the received first TPC indicator; and adjusting the transmissionpower level of the second subset of the TF resources based on thereceived second TPC indicator.

In representative embodiment 21, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-20 may further comprise: receiving, by the WTRU,muting information related to power control that is associated with theone or more TF resources to be muted, wherein the muting of the one ormore TF resources may be in accordance with the received mutinginformation related to the power control.

In representative embodiment 22, the method of representative embodiment21, wherein the received muting information related to power control maybe any of: (1) offset power information associated with the one or moreTF resources indicating an offset from the current transmission power ofthe one or more TF resources; and/or (2) differential power informationassociated with the one or more TF resources indicating one or moredifferences between the transmission power of the one or more TFresources and other TF resources in a subframe.

In representative embodiment 23, the method of any one of the precedingrepresentative embodiments, wherein the communication in the firstdirection may be a communication in an uplink direction and thecommunication in the second direction may be a communication in adownlink direction.

In representative embodiment 24, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-22, wherein the communication in the firstdirection may be a communication in a downlink direction and thecommunication in the second direction may be a communication in anuplink direction.

In representative embodiment 25, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-24, wherein the WTRU may be any of a mobileterminal, a network access point (NAP), an evolved Node B (eNB), a HomeeNB (HeNB), a Node B, a Home Node B (HNB), or a relay node.

In representative embodiment 26, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-25 may further comprise: receiving, determining,or obtaining a priority or a relative priority of any of: one or moreDemodulation Reference Signals, one or more control channels, one ormore resource elements and/or one or more Resource Blocks for thecommunication in the second direction; and determining a correspondingTF location or TF locations associated with the one or more TF resourcesfor the communication in the first direction to be muted based on thepriority or the relative priority, wherein the muting may include mutingthe one or more TF resources at the corresponding TF location or TFlocations for the communication in the first direction.

In representative embodiment 27, the method of representative embodiment26, wherein the receiving of the priority or relative priority mayinclude receiving an indication in downlink control information (DCI).

In representative embodiment 28, the method of any one of the precedingrepresentative embodiments may further comprise: receiving an indicatorindicating one or more subframes for the WTRU to use a full duplexoperation; and selectively using, by the WTRU, the full duplex operationin the indicated one or more subframes such that the one or moresubframes are configured for simultaneous transmission and reception ofradio frequency (RF) signals.

In representative embodiment 29, the method of any one of the precedingrepresentative embodiments, wherein an operation and/or a number ofsubframes of the WTRU using the full duplex operation may be independentof a distance of the WTRU to its network access point.

In representative embodiment 30, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-29, wherein the muting of the one or more TFresources may reduce or substantially eliminate transmit/receiveself-interference from the WTRU and/or neighbor interference for theWTRU between or among the WTRU and one or more other devices.

In representative embodiment 31, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1 and 3-30, wherein the shortening of the one or moresubframes may reduce or substantially eliminate transmit/receiveself-interference from the WTRU and/or neighbor interference for theWTRU between or among the WTRU and one or more other devices.

In representative embodiment 32, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-31, wherein the muting of the one or more TFresources may be based on one or more TF locations of a signalcommunicated in the second direction, one or more TF locations of achannel for communication in the second direction and/or one or more TFlocations of a reference signal (RS) to be communicated in the seconddirection.

In representative embodiment 33, the method of representative embodiment32, wherein the signal, the RS or the channel may include any of: (1)primary and secondary synchronization signals (PSS/SSS), (2) a physicalbroadcast channel (PBCH), (3) a cell-specific RS (CRS) and/or (4) aDemodulation-RS (DM-RS).

In representative embodiment 34, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-33 may further comprise: determining whether asubframe is potentially a self-interference subframe and/or potentiallya neighbor-interference subframe, as a determined result, wherein themuting of the one or more TF resources may be in accordance with thedetermined result.

In representative embodiment 35, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-34 may further comprise: establishing asupportable self-interference level (SIL) indicating a level of signalinterference supportable for full duplex operations; and controllingtransmission power of the one or more TF resources such that a SIL doesnot exceed an interference level in accordance with the supportable SIL.

In representative embodiment 36, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-35 may further comprise: determining whether asubframe is to be used for MBSFN operations, as a determined result,wherein the muting of the one or more TF resources may be in accordancewith the determined result.

In representative embodiment 37, the method of representative embodiment5, wherein the priority signaling may include any of: (1) a downlink(DL) synchronization channel; (2) a DL broadcast channel; (3) a DLreference signal, (4) a DL control channel; (5) a UL control channel;and/or (6) a UL reference signal.

In representative embodiment 38, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-37 may further comprise mapping a signal to aplurality of TF resources including the one or more TF resources to bemuted, wherein the muting of the one or more TF resources forcommunication in the first direction may include puncturing the mappedTF resources at TF locations associated with the one or more TFresources.

In representative embodiment 39, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-38, wherein the muting of one or more TF resourcesfor communication in the first direction may include rate-matching so asto avoid mapping a plurality of TF resources at TF locations associatedwith the one or more TF resources to be muted.

In representative embodiment 40, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-39, wherein the muting of one or more TF resourcesfor communication in the first direction may be configured via messagingwith a network resource.

In representative embodiment 41, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-40, wherein the muting of one or more TF resourcesfor communication in the first direction may include: determining arelative priority of a first signal for communication in the firstdirection relative to a second signal for communication in the seconddirection based on at least the information associated with thecommunication in the second direction; and selectively muting the one ormore TF resources of a plurality of TF resources for communication inthe first direction based on the determined relative priority.

In representative embodiment 42, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-41, wherein the muting of the one or more TFresources may include subframe shortening to reduce interference levels.

In representative embodiment 43, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1, and 3-42, wherein the shortening of the subframe mayinclude muting of the one or more TF resources to reduce interferencelevels.

In representative embodiment 44, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-43, wherein the muting of the one or more TFresources may include dynamically or semi-statically configuring anumber of symbols of a subframe for communication in the firstdirection.

In representative embodiment 45, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-44, wherein the dynamically or semi-staticallyconfiguring of the number of symbols may include: determining a startingsymbol associated with the subframe for communication in the firstdirection; and muting one or more symbols of the subframe that are to becommunicated in the first direction located at a time prior to a time ofthe starting symbol.

In representative embodiment 46, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-45, wherein the muting of the one or more TFresources may be conditioned on any of: (1) a transmission power in thefirst direction being higher than a threshold; (2) a Transport BlockSize (TBS) of the one or more TF resources exceeding a threshold; (3) aModulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) of the one or more TF resourcesexceeding a threshold; and/or (4) a redundancy version of the one ormore TF resources exceeding a threshold.

In representative embodiment 47, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-46, wherein the one or more TF resources may be asubset of a subframe, the method may further comprise transmitting oneor more signals or reference signals (RSs) associated with the muted TFresources or a subset of the muted TF resources in one or more differentparts of the subframe for communication in the first direction.

In representative embodiment 48, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-47 may further comprise time and/or frequencyshifting one or more signals or one or more reference signals (RSs)associated with the muted TF resources for communication in the firstdirection.

In representative embodiment 49, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-48, wherein the muting of the one or more TFresources may be conditioned on: the one or more TF resources beinglocated in any of: (1) one or more particular TF locations; (2) one ormore TF locations in a center portion of a frequency band; (3) one ormore TF locations in an edge portion of the frequency band; (4) aparticular subframe; (5) a subframe relative to signaling or anindication in an earlier subframe; (6) a particular symbol; and/or (7) aparticular symbol relative to signaling or an indication in an earliersymbol.

In representative embodiment 50, the method of any one of the precedingrepresentative embodiments may further comprise: applying zerotransmission power, low transmission power and/or an almost blanksubframe (ABS), as an applied transmission power reduction, to one or aplurality of TF resources in the first direction; and measuring aninterference level for the second direction at TF locations associatedwith the applied TF resources.

In representative embodiment 51, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 1-2 and 4-50 may further comprise determining one or morepriorities for the one or more TF resources associated with thecommunication in the first direction based on any of: (1) Quality ofService (QoS) parameters for one or more logical channels associatedwith the one or more TF resources; (2) a number of retransmissionsassociated with one or a plurality of the one or more TF resources forthe communication in the first direction; and/or (3) whether one or aplurality of the one or more TF resources are for a retransmission ofthe communication in the first direction.

In representative embodiment 52, the method of any one of the precedingrepresentative embodiments may further comprise determining or detectingone or more priorities associated with TF resources at TF locations forcommunication in the second direction that correspond to the one or moreTF resources associated with the communication in the first direction,wherein the TF muting, the symbol muting and/or the subframe shorteningmay be based on a relative priority of the TF resources associated witha corresponding TF location for the communication in the first directionand the communication in the second direction.

In representative embodiment 53, a method implemented in a WirelessTransmit/Receive Unit (WTRU) may comprise: obtaining informationassociated with communication in the second direction indicating aself-interference condition, a potential self-interference condition, aneighboring interference condition or a potential neighboringinterference condition; and configuring the WTRU for an interferenceavoiding TF resource structure on condition that the informationassociated with communication in the second direction indicates any of:the self-interference condition, the potential self-interferencecondition, the neighboring interference condition and/or the potentialneighboring interference condition.

In representative embodiment 54, the method of representative embodiment53, wherein: the self-interference condition may indicate interferencebetween TF resources for transmission in the first direction from theWTRU and priority TF resources for reception in the second direction bythe WTRU; and the neighboring interference condition may indicateinterference between or among TF resources for transmission in the firstdirection from the WTRU and priority TF resources for reception in thesecond direction by one or more other WTRUs.

In representative embodiment 55, the method of any of the precedingrepresentative embodiments may use any combination of TF muting, symbolmuting and subframe shortening.

In representative embodiment 56, a method implemented by a NetworkAccess Point (NAP) in communication with a Wireless Transmit/ReceiveUnit (WTRU) using time-frequency (TF) resources for communications infirst and second directions may comprise: determining whether to TFmute, symbol mute, and/or subframe shorten a communication in the firstdirection for controlling interference between the communication in thefirst direction and a communication in the second direction, andsending, by the NAP, configuration information for the WTRU to TF mute,symbol mute and/or subframe shorten one or more TF resources, one ormore symbols and/or one or more subframes for communication in the firstdirection.

In representative embodiment 57, the method of representative embodiment56, wherein the configuration information may include an indication toselectively TF mute, selectively symbol mute and/or selectively subframeshorten the one or more TF resources, the one or more symbols and/or theone or more subframes based on a relative priority of any of: one ormore signals, one or more channels, one or more RBs, one or more REsand/or one more symbols.

In representative embodiment 58, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 56 or 57 may further comprise sending, by the NAP, anindication of one or more subframes that are to include Full DuplexRadio Resources (FDRRs).

In representative embodiment 59, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 56-58, wherein the sending of the configuration informationmay enable the WTRU to apply any of: respectively different powercontrol loops, respectively different power control offsets,respectively different P_(CMAX) values and/or respectively differentP_(CMAX,c) values for different TF resources associated with differentTF regions.

In representative embodiment 60, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 56-59, wherein the configuration information may include anyof: (1) a fixed rank indicated from downlink control information (DCI)for a first subset of TF resources; and/or (2) a first rank indicatedfrom the DCI for the first subset of TF resources that is smaller than asecond rank for a second subset of TF resources.

In representative embodiment 61, the method of embodiment 60, whereinthe DCI may indicate an offset for the first rank from the second rank.

In representative embodiment 62, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 56-61, wherein the sending of the configuration informationmay include sending, in downlink control information (DCI), a firstModulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) level for a first subset of aplurality of TF resources and a second MCS level for a second subset ofthe plurality of TF resources for the WTRU to set a transmission powerlevel of the first subset of the TF resources to a reduced levelrelative to a transmission power level of the second subset of the TFresources based on the received first and second MCS levels and to set aMCS level of the first subset of the TF resources to the first MCS leveland a MCS level of the second subset of TF resources to the second MCSlevel based on the received first and second MCS levels.

In representative embodiment 63, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 56-62, wherein the sending of the configuration informationmay include sending, in downlink control information (DCI), a firsttransmission power control (TPC) indicator associated with a firstsubset of the TF resources and a second TPC indicator associated with asecond subset of the TF resources to individually adjust a transmissionpower level of the first and second subsets of the TF resources.

In representative embodiment 64, the method of any one of embodiments56-63, wherein the sending of the configuration information may includesending muting information related to power control associated with theone or more TF resources to be muted.

In representative embodiment 65, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 56-64, wherein the sending of the configuration informationmay include sending an indication that any of: one or more referencesignals, one or more control channels, one or more resource elementsand/or one or more Resource Blocks in the communication in the seconddirection are a priority.

In representative embodiment 66, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 56-65, wherein the sending of the configuration informationmay include sending an indicator indicating one or more subframes forthe WTRU to use a full duplex operation.

In representative embodiment 67, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 56-66, wherein the sending of the configuration informationmay include sending an indication of a starting symbol associated with asubframe for communication in the first direction to configure the WTRUfor muting one or more symbols of the subframe that are to becommunicated in the first direction located at a time prior to a timeindicated by the starting symbol.

In representative embodiment 68, the method of any one of representativeembodiments 56-67 may further comprise determining or establishing, bythe NAP, one or more priorities for the one or more TF resourcesassociated with the communication in the first direction based on anyof: (1) Quality of Service (QoS) parameters for one or more logicalchannels associated with the one or more TF resources; (2) a number ofretransmissions associated with one or a plurality of the one or more TFresources for the communication in the first direction; and/or (3)whether one or a plurality of the one or more TF resources are for aretransmission of the communication in the first direction.

In representative embodiment 69, a Wireless Transmit/Receive Unit (WTRU)configured to use time-frequency (TF) resources for communication infirst and second directions may comprises: a full duplextransmitter/receiver unit configured to transmit and receive full duplexcommunications; and a processor configured to TF resource mute or symbolmute one or more TF resources for communication in the first directionbased on information associated with a communication in the seconddirection or subframe shorten one or more TF resources for communicationin the first direction based on information associated with acommunication in the second direction.

In representative embodiment 70, a Wireless Transmit/Receive Unit (WTRU)configured to use time-frequency (TF) resources for communications infirst and second directions may comprise a processor configured to muteone or more TF resources for communication in the first direction basedon information associated with a communication in the second direction.

In representative embodiment 71, a Wireless Transmit/Receive Unit (WTRU)configured to use one or a plurality of subframes for communications infirst and second directions may comprise a processor configured toshorten a subframe for communication in the first direction based oninformation associated with a communication in the second direction.

In representative embodiment 72, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiment 69 to 71, wherein: the full duplex transmitter/receiver unitmay be configured to receive the information associated with thecommunication in the second direction; and the processor may beconfigured to detect, obtain or determine the information associatedwith the communication in the second direction.

In representative embodiment 73, the WTRU of representative embodiment72, wherein the full duplex transmitter/receiver unit and the processormay be configured to obtain any of: a priority or a relative priority ofsignaling, of channels, of resources, of Resource Elements (REs), ofResource Blocks and/or of symbols and/or a list, an ordered list or anindication of priority signaling, of priority channels, of priorityresources, of priority Resource Elements (REs), of priority ResourceBlocks and/or of priority symbols.

In representative embodiment 74, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69-73, wherein the full duplex transmitter/receiver unit maybe configured to receive at least a portion of the communication in thesecond direction while transmitting at least a portion of thecommunication in the first direction.

In representative embodiment 75, the WTRU of representative embodiment73, wherein the processor may be configured to establish time intervalsin which the communications in the first and second directions: (1)overlap in frequency and/or (2) a first frequency or a first frequencyband of the communication in the first direction is within a thresholdof a second frequency or a second frequency band of the communication inthe second direction.

In representative embodiment 76, the WTRU of any one of therepresentative embodiments 69-75, wherein: the processor may beconfigured to establish one or more subframes that are to include FullDuplex Radio Resources (FDRRs); and the full duplex transmitter/receiverunit may be configured to receive the one or more subframes that are toinclude the FDRRs.

In representative embodiment 77, the WTRU of representative embodiment76, wherein the processor may be configured to configure one or aplurality of subframes of the set subframes as one or more multimediabroadcast multicast service single frequency network (MBSFN) subframes.

In representative embodiment 78 the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70, and 72-77, wherein the one or more TF resources mayinclude any of: (1) one or more Resource Elements (REs), one or moreResource Blocks (RBs), and/or (3) one or more symbols.

In representative embodiment 79, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69 and 71-78, wherein the processor may be configured toshorten a subframe that includes one or more symbols which are muted.

In representative embodiment 80, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-79, wherein the processor may be configured tomute the one or more TF resources via any of: (1) a blanking operation;(2) a puncturing operation; (3) a rate matching operation; and/or (4) atransmission power control operation.

In representative embodiment 81, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-80, wherein the processor may be configured toadjust transmission power levels between or among subsets of the TFresources associated with the communication in the first direction toreduce or substantially eliminate interference to the communication inthe second direction.

In representative embodiment 82, the WTRU of representative embodiment81, wherein the processor may be configured to reduce a power level to azero power level or a lion-zero power level which is sufficient toenable the communication in the second direction.

In representative embodiment 83, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-82, wherein the processor may be configured toapply any of: respectively different power control loops, respectivelydifferent power control offsets, respectively different P_(CMAX) valuesand/or respectively different P_(CMAX,c) values for different TFresources associated with different TF regions.

In representative embodiment 84, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-83, wherein the processor may be configured toset a transmission power level of a first subset of the TF resources toa reduced level relative to a transmission power level of a secondsubset of the TF resources.

In representative embodiment 85, the WTRU of representative embodiment84, wherein the processor may be configured to adjust a ModulationCoding Scheme (MCS) level of the first subset of the TF resources to anyof: (1) a lower MCS level and/or (2) a lowest MCS level.

In representative embodiment 86, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-85, wherein: the full duplextransmitter/receiver unit may be configured to receive, in downlinkcontrol information (DCI), a first MCS level for a first subset of aplurality of TF resources and a second MCS level for a second subset ofthe plurality of TF resources; and the processor may be configured toset a transmission power level of the first subset of the TF resourcesto a reduced level relative to a transmission power level of the secondsubset of the TF resources based on the received first and second MCSlevels and set a MCS level of the first subset of the TF resources tothe first MCS level and a MCS level of the second subset of the TFresources to the second MCS level based on the received first and secondMCS levels.

In representative embodiment 87, the WTRU of representative embodiment86, wherein the reduced level may be a zero power level or a non-zeropower level which is sufficient to enable the communication in thesecond direction.

In representative embodiment 88, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-87, wherein: the full duplextransmitter/receiver unit may be configured to receive, in downlinkcontrol information (DCI), a first transmission power control (TPC)indicator associated with a first subset of the TF resources and asecond TPC indicator associated with a second subset of the TFresources; and the processor may be configured to adjust thetransmission power level of the first subset of the TF resources basedon the received first TPC indicator and adjust the transmission powerlevel of the second subset of the TF resources based on the receivedsecond TPC indicator.

In representative embodiment 89, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-88, wherein: the full duplextransmitter/receiver unit may be configured to receive mutinginformation related to power control that is associated with the one ormore TF resources to be muted; and, the processor may be configured tomute the one or more TF resources in accordance with the received mutinginformation related to the power control.

In representative embodiment 90, the WTRU of representative embodiment89, wherein the received muting information related to power control maybe any of: (1) offset power information associated with the one or moreTF resources indicating an offset from the current transmission power ofthe one or more TF resources; and/or (2) differential power informationassociated with the one or more TF resources indicating one or moredifferences between the transmission power of the one or more TFresources and other TF resources in a subframe.

In representative embodiment 91, the WTRU of any one of therepresentative embodiments 69-90, wherein the communication in the firstdirection may be a communication in an uplink direction and thecommunication in the second direction may be a communication in adownlink direction.

In representative embodiment 92, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69-90, wherein the communication in the first direction maybe a communication in a downlink direction and the communication in thesecond direction may be a communication in an uplink direction.

In representative embodiment 93, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-92, wherein the WTRU may be any of: a mobileterminal, a network access point (NAP), an evolved Node B (eNB), a HomeeNB (HeNB), a Node B, a Home Node B (HNB), and/or a relay node.

In representative embodiment 94, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-93, wherein the WTRU may be configured to:receive, determine, or obtain a priority or a relative priority of anyof: one or more Demodulation Reference Signals, one or more controlchannels, one or more resource elements and/or one or more ResourceBlocks for the communication in the second direction; and determine acorresponding TF location or TF locations associated with the one ormore TF resources for the communication in the first direction to bemuted based on the priority or the relative priority such that one ormore TF resources at the corresponding TF location or TF locations forthe communication in the first direction may be muted.

In representative embodiment 95, the WTRU of representative embodiment94, wherein the full duplex transmitter/receiver unit may be configuredto receive the priority or relative priority in an indication indownlink control information (DCI).

In representative embodiment 96, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69-95, wherein: the full duplex transmitter/receiver unitmay be configured to receive an indicator indicating one or moresubframes for the WTRU to use full duplex operation; and the processormay be configured to selectively use the full duplex operation in theindicated one or more subframes such that the one or more subframes maybe configured for simultaneous transmission and reception of radiofrequency (RF) signals.

In representative embodiment 97, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69-96, wherein an operation and/or a number of subframes ofthe WTRU using the full duplex operation may be independent of adistance of the WTRU to its network access point.

In representative embodiment 98, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-97, wherein the processor may be configured tomute the one or more TF resources to reduce or substantially eliminatetransmit/receive self-interference from the WTRU and/or neighborinterference for the WTRU between or among the WTRU and one or moreother devices.

In representative embodiment 99, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69 and 71-98, wherein the processor may be configured toshorten the one or more subframes to reduce or substantially eliminatetransmit/receive self-interference from the WTRU and/or neighborinterference for the WTRU between or among the WTRU and one or moreother devices.

In representative embodiment 100, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-99, wherein the processor may be configured tomute the one or more TF resources based on one or more TF locations of asignal communicated or to be communicated in the second direction, oneor more TF locations of a channel for communication in the seconddirection and/or one or more TF locations of a reference signal (RS) tobe communicated in the second direction.

In representative embodiment 101, the WTRU of representative embodiment100, wherein the signal, the RS or the channel may include any of: (1)primary and secondary synchronization signals (PSS/SSS), (2) a physicalbroadcast channel (PBCH), (3) a cell-specific RS (CRS) and/or (4) aDemodulation-RS (DM-RS).

In representative embodiment 102, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69-70 and 72-101, wherein the processor may be configuredto: determine whether a subframe is potentially a self-interferencesubframe and/or potentially a neighbor-interference subframe, as adetermined result; and mute the one or more TF resources in accordancewith the determined result.

In representative embodiment 103, the method of any one ofrepresentative embodiments 69, 70 and 72-102, wherein the processor maybe configured to: establish a supportable self-interference level (SIL)indicating a level of signal interference supportable for full duplexoperations; and control transmission power of the one or more TFresources such that a SIL does not exceed an interference level inaccordance with the supportable SIL.

In representative embodiment 104, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-103, wherein the processor may be configuredto: determine whether a subframe is to be used for MBSFN operations, asa determined result; and mute the one or more TF resources in accordancewith the determined result.

In representative embodiment 105, the WTRU of representative embodiment73, wherein the priority signaling may include any of: (1) a downlink(DL) synchronization channel; (2) a DL broadcast channel; (3) a DLreference signal, (4) a DL control channel; (5) a UL control channel;and/or (6) a UL reference signal.

In representative embodiment 106, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-105, wherein the processor may be configuredto: map a signal to a plurality of TF resources including the one or-more TF resources to be muted; and puncture the mapped TF resources atTF locations associated with the one or more TF resources.

In representative embodiment 107, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-106, wherein the processor may be configuredto rate-match so as to avoid mapping a plurality of TF resources at TFlocations associated with the one or more TF resources to be muted.

In representative embodiment 108. the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-107, wherein the processor may be configuredto mute the one or more TF resources for communication in the firstdirection via messaging with a network resource.

In representative embodiment 109, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-108, wherein the processor may be configuredto: determine a relative priority of a first signal for communication inthe first direction relative to a second signal for communication in thesecond direction based on at least the information associated with thecommunication in the second direction; and selectively mute the one ormore TF resources of a plurality of TF resources for communication inthe first direction based on the determined relative priority.

In representative embodiment 110, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-109, wherein the processor may be configuredto shorten a subframe to reduce interference levels.

In representative embodiment 111, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-110, wherein the processor may be configuredto mute the one or more TF resources to reduce interference levels.

In representative embodiment 112, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-111, wherein the processor may be configuredto dynamically or semi-statically configure a number of symbols of asubframe for communication in the first direction.

In representative embodiment 113, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-112, wherein the processor may be configuredto: determine a starting symbol associated with the subframe forcommunication in the first direction; and mute one or more symbols ofthe subframe that are to be communicated in the first direction locatedat a time prior to a time of the starting symbol.

In representative embodiment 114, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-113, wherein the processor may be configuredto mute the one or more TF resources conditioned on any of: (1) atransmission power in the first direction being higher than a threshold;(2) a Transport Block Size (TBS) of the one or more TF resourcesexceeding a threshold; (3) a Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) of theone or more TF resources exceeding a threshold; and/or (4) a redundancyversion of the one or more TF resources exceeding a threshold.

In representative embodiment 115, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-114, wherein the full duplextransmitter/receiver unit may be configured to transmit one or moresignals or reference signals (RSs) associated with the muted TFresources or a subset of the muted TF resources in one or more differentparts of the subframe for communication in the first direction.

In representative embodiment 116, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-115, wherein the processor may be configuredto time and/or frequency shift one or more signals or one or morereference signals (RSs) associated with the muted TF resources forcommunication in the first direction.

In representative embodiment 117, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-116, wherein the processor may be configuredto mute the one or more TF resources conditioned on: the one or more TFresources being located in any of: (1) one or more particular TFlocations; (2) one or more TF locations in a center portion of afrequency band; (3) one or more TF locations in an edge portion of thefrequency band; (4) a particular subframe; (5) a subframe relative tosignaling or an indication in an earlier subframe; (6) a particularsymbol; and/or (7) a particular symbol relative to signaling or anindication in an earlier symbol.

In representative embodiment 118, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69-117, wherein the processor may be configured to: applyzero transmission power, low transmission power and/or an almost blanksubframe (ABS), as an applied transmission power reduction, to one or aplurality of TF resources in the first direction; and measure aninterference level for the second direction at TF locations associatedwith the applied TF resources.

In representative embodiment 119, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-118, wherein the processor may be configuredto determine one or more priorities for the one or more TF resourcesassociated with the communication in the first direction based on anyof: (1) Quality of Service (QoS) parameters for one or more logicalchannels associated with the one or more TF resources; (2) a number ofretransmissions associated with one or a plurality of the one or more TFresources for the communication in the first direction; and/or (3)whether one or a plurality of the one or more TF resources are for aretransmission of the communication in the first direction.

In representative embodiment 120, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 69, 70 and 72-119, wherein the processor may be configuredto: determine or detect one or more priorities associated with TFresources at TF locations for communication in the second direction thatcorrespond to the one or more TF resources associated with thecommunication in the first direction; and TF mute, symbol mute and/orsubframe shorten based on a relative priority of the TF resourcesassociated with a corresponding TF location for the communication in thefirst direction and the communication in the second direction.

In representative embodiment 121, a Wireless Transmit/Receive Unit(WTRU) may comprise: a transmitter/receiver unit configured to obtaininformation associated with communication in the second directionindicating a self-interference condition, a potential self-interferencecondition, a neighboring interference condition or a potentialneighboring interference condition; and a processor configured toconfigure the WTRU for an interference avoiding TF resource structure oncondition that the information associated with communication in thesecond direction indicates any of: the self-interference condition, thepotential self-interference condition, the neighboring interferencecondition and/or the potential neighboring interference condition.

In representative embodiment 122, the WTRU of representative embodiments121, wherein: the self-interference condition may indicate interferencebetween TF resources for transmission in the first direction from theWTRU and priority TF resources for reception in the second direction bythe WTRU; and the neighboring interference condition may indicateinterference between or among TF resources for transmission in the firstdirection from the WTRU and priority TF resources for reception in thesecond direction by one or more other WTRUs.

In representative embodiment 123, the WTRU of any one of representativeembodiments 121-122, wherein the processor may be configured to use anycombination of TF muting, symbol muting and subframe shortening toreduce or substantially eliminate self-interference or neighboringinterference.

In representative embodiment 124, a Network Access Point (NAP) incommunication with a Wireless Transmit/Receive Unit (WTRU) usingtime-frequency (TF) resources for communications in first and seconddirections may comprise: a processor configured to determine whether toTF mute, symbol mute, and/or subframe shorten a communication in thefirst direction for controlling interference between the communicationin the first direction and a communication in the second direction; anda full duplex transmitter/receiver unit configured to send configurationinformation for the WTRU to TF mute, symbol mute and/or subframe shortenone or more TF resources, one or more symbols and/or one or moresubframes for communication in the first direction.

In representative embodiment 125, the NAP of representative embodiment124, wherein the configuration information may include an indication toselectively TF mute, selectively symbol mute and/or selectively subframeshorten the one or more TF resources, the one or more symbols and/or theone or more subframes based on a relative priority of any of: one ormore signals, one or more channels, one or more RBs, one or more REsand/or one more symbols.

In representative embodiment 126, the NAP of any one of representativeembodiments 124-125, wherein the full duplex transmitter/receiver unitmay be configured to send an indication of one or more subframes thatare to include Full Duplex Radio Resources (FDRRs).

In representative embodiment 127, the NAP of any one of representativeembodiments 124-126, wherein the processor and the full duplextransmitter/receiver unit may be configured to generate and send theconfiguration information to the WTRU to enable the WTRU to apply anyof: respectively different power control loops, respectively differentpower control offsets, respectively different P_(CMAX) values and/orrespectively different P_(CMAX,c) values for different TF resourcesassociated with different TF regions.

In representative embodiment 128, the NAP of any one of representativeembodiments 124-127, wherein the configuration information may includeany of: (1) a fixed rank indicated from downlink control information(DCI) for a first subset of TF resources; and/or (2) a first rankindicated from the DCI for the first subset of TF resources that issmaller than a second rank for a second subset of TF resources.

In representative embodiment 129, the NAP of representative embodiment128, wherein the DCI may indicate an offset for the first rank from thesecond rank.

In representative embodiment 130, the NAP of any one of representativeembodiments 124-129, wherein the processor and the full duplextransmitter/receiver unit may be configured to generate and send, indownlink control information (DCI), a first Modulation and Coding Scheme(MCS) level for a first subset of a plurality of TF resources and asecond MCS level for a second subset of the plurality of TF resourcesfor the WTRU to set a transmission power level of the first subset ofthe TF resources to a reduced level relative to a transmission powerlevel of the second subset of the TF resources based on the receivedfirst and second MCS levels and to set a MCS level of the first subsetof the TF resources to the first MCS level and a MCS level of the secondsubset of TF resources to the second MCS level based on the receivedfirst and second MCS levels.

In representative embodiment 131, the NAP of any one of representativeembodiments 124-130, wherein the processor and the full duplextransmitter/receiver unit may be configured to generate and send, indownlink control information (DCI), a first transmission power control(TPC) indicator associated with a first subset of the TF resources and asecond TPC indicator associated with a second subset of the TF resourcesto individually adjust a transmission power level of the first andsecond subsets of the TF resources.

In representative embodiment 132, the NAP of any one of representativeembodiments 124-131, wherein the processor and the full duplextransmitter/receiver unit may be configured to generate and send mutinginformation related to power control associated with the one or more TFresources to be muted.

In representative embodiment 133, the NAP of any one of representativeembodiments 124-132, wherein the processor and the full duplextransmitter/receiver unit may be configured to generate and send anindication that any of: one or more reference signals, one or morecontrol channels, one or more resource elements and/or one or moreResource Blocks in the communication in the second direction are apriority.

In representative embodiment 134, the NAP of any one of representativeembodiments 124-133, wherein the processor and the full duplextransmitter/receiver unit may be configured to generate and send anindicator indicating one or more subframes for the WTRU to use fullduplex operation.

In representative embodiment 135, the NAP of any one of representativeembodiments 124-134, wherein the processor and the full duplextransmitter/receiver unit may be configured to generate and send anindication of a starting symbol associated with a subframe forcommunication in the first direction to configure the WTRU for mutingone or more symbols of the subframe that are to be communicated in thefirst direction located at a time prior to a time indicated by thestarting symbol.

In representative embodiment 136, the NAP of any one of representativeembodiments 124-135, wherein the processor and the full duplextransmitter/receiver unit may be configured to: determine or establishone or more priorities for the one or more TF resources associated withthe communication in the first direction based on any of (1) Quality ofService (QoS) parameters for one or more logical channels associatedwith the one or more TF resources; (2) a number of retransmissionsassociated with one or a plurality of the one or more TF resources forthe communication in the first direction; and/or (3) whether one or aplurality of the one or more TF resources are for a retransmission ofthe communication in the first direction.

Although features and elements are described above in particularcombinations, one of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that eachfeature or element can be used alone or in any combination with theother features and elements. In addition, the methods described hereinmay be implemented in a computer program, software, or firmwareincorporated in a computer readable medium for execution by a computeror processor. Examples of non-transitory computer-readable storage mediainclude, but are not limited to, a read only memory (ROM), random accessmemory (RAM), a register, cache memory, semiconductor memory devices,magnetic media such as internal hard disks and removable disks,magneto-optical media, and optical media such as CD-ROM disks, anddigital versatile disks (DVDs). A processor in association with softwaremay be used to implement a radio frequency transceiver for use in a UE,WTRU, terminal, base station, RNC, or any host computer.

Moreover, in the embodiments described above, processing platforms,computing systems, controllers, and other devices containing processorsare noted. These devices may contain at least one Central ProcessingUnit (“CPU”) and memory. In accordance with the practices of personsskilled in the art of computer programming, reference to acts andsymbolic representations of operations or instructions may be performedby the various CPUs and memories. Such acts and operations orinstructions may be referred to as being “executed,” “computer executed”or “CPU executed.”

One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the acts andsymbolically represented operations or instructions include themanipulation of electrical signals by the CPU. An electrical systemrepresents data bits that can cause a resulting transformation orreduction of the electrical signals and the maintenance of data bits atmemory locations in a memory system to thereby reconfigure or otherwisealter the CPU's operation, as well as other processing of signals. Thememory locations where data bits are maintained are physical locationsthat have particular electrical, magnetic, optical, or organicproperties corresponding to or representative of the data bits. Itshould be understood that the exemplary embodiments are not limited tothe above-mentioned platforms or CPUs and that other platforms and CPUsmay support the provided methods.

The data bits may also be maintained on a computer readable mediumincluding magnetic disks, optical disks, and any other volatile (e.g.,Random Access Memory (“RAM”)) or non-volatile (e.g., Read-Only Memory(“ROM”)) mass storage system readable by the CPU. The computer readablemedium may include cooperating or interconnected computer readablemedium, which exist exclusively on the processing system or aredistributed among multiple interconnected processing systems that may belocal or remote to the processing system. It is understood that therepresentative embodiments are not limited to the above-mentionedmemories and that other platforms and memories may support the describedmethods.

In an illustrative embodiment, any of the operations, processes, etc.described herein may be implemented as computer-readable instructionsstored on a computer-readable medium. The computer-readable instructionsmay be executed by a processor of a mobile unit, a network element,and/or any other computing device.

There is little distinction left between hardware and softwareimplementations of aspects of systems. The use of hardware or softwareis generally (but not always, in that in certain contexts the choicebetween hardware and software may become significant) a design choicerepresenting cost vs. efficiency tradeoffs. There may be variousvehicles by which processes and/or systems and/or other technologiesdescribed herein may be effected (e.g., hardware, software, and/orfirmware), and the preferred vehicle may vary with the context in whichthe processes and/or systems and/or other technologies are deployed. Forexample, if an implementer determines that speed and accuracy areparamount, the implementer may opt for a mainly hardware and/or firmwarevehicle. If flexibility is paramount, the implementer may opt for amainly software implementation. Alternatively, the implementer may optfor some combination of hardware, software, and/or firmware.

The foregoing detailed description has set forth various embodiments ofthe devices and/or processes via the use of block diagrams, flowcharts,and/or examples. Insofar as such block diagrams, flowcharts, and/orexamples contain one or more functions and/or operations, it will beunderstood by those within the art that each function and/or operationwithin such block diagrams, flowcharts, or examples may be implemented,individually and/or collectively, by a wide range of hardware, software,firmware, or virtually any combination thereof. Suitable processorsinclude, by way of example, a general purpose processor, a specialpurpose processor, a conventional processor, a digital signal processor(DSP), a plurality of microprocessors, one or more microprocessors inassociation with a DSP core, a controller, a microcontroller,Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), Application SpecificStandard Products (ASSPs); Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs)circuits, any other type of integrated circuit (IC), and/or a statemachine.

Although features and elements are provided above in particularcombinations, one of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that eachfeature or element can be used alone or in any combination with theother features and elements. The present disclosure is not to be limitedin terms of the particular embodiments described in this application,which are intended as illustrations of various aspects. Manymodifications and variations may be made without departing from itsspirit and scope, as will be apparent to those skilled in the art. Noelement, act, or instruction used in the description of the presentapplication should be construed as critical or essential to theinvention unless explicitly provided as such. Functionally equivalentmethods and apparatuses within the scope of the disclosure, in additionto those enumerated herein, will be apparent to those skilled in the artfrom the foregoing descriptions. Such modifications and variations arcintended to fall within the scope of the appended claims. The presentdisclosure is to be limited only by the terms of the appended claims,along with the full scope of equivalents to which such claims areentitled. It is to be understood that this disclosure is not limited toparticular methods or systems.

It is also to be understood that the terminology used herein is for thepurpose of describing particular embodiments only, and is not intendedto be limiting. As used herein, when referred to herein, the terms “userequipment” and its abbreviation “UE” may mean (i) a wireless transmitand/or receive unit (WTRU), such as described infra; (ii) any of anumber of embodiments of a WTRU, such as described infra; (iii) awireless-capable and/or wired-capable (e.g., tetherable) deviceconfigured with, inter alia, some or all structures and functionality ofa WTRU, such as described infra; (iii) a wireless-capable and/orwired-capable device configured with less than all structures andfunctionality of a WTRU, such as described infra; or (iv) the like.Details of an example WTRU, which may be representative of any WTRUrecited herein, are provided below with respect to FIGS. 1-5 .

In certain representative embodiments, several portions of the subjectmatter described herein may be implemented via Application SpecificIntegrated Circuits (ASICs), Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs),digital signal processors (DSPs), and/or other integrated formats.However, those skilled in the art will recognize that some aspects ofthe embodiments disclosed herein, in whole or in part, may beequivalently implemented in integrated circuits, as one or more computerprograms running on one or more computers (e.g., as one or more programsrunning on one or more computer systems), as one or more programsrunning on one or more processors (e.g., as one or more programs runningon one or more microprocessors), as firmware, or as virtually anycombination thereof, and that designing the circuitry and/or writing thecode for the software and or firmware would be well within the skill ofone of skill in the art in light of this disclosure. In addition, thoseskilled in the art will appreciate that the mechanisms of the subjectmatter described herein may be distributed as a program product in avariety of forms, and that an illustrative embodiment of the subjectmatter described herein applies regardless of the particular type ofsignal bearing medium used to actually carry out the distribution.Examples of a signal bearing medium include, but are not limited to, thefollowing: a recordable type medium such as a floppy disk, a hard diskdrive, a CD, a DVD, a digital tape, a computer memory, etc., and atransmission type medium such as a digital and/or an analogcommunication medium (e.g., a fiber optic cable, a waveguide, a wiredcommunications link, a wireless communication link, etc.).

The herein described subject matter sometimes illustrates differentcomponents contained within, or connected with, different othercomponents. It is to be understood that such depicted architectures aremerely examples, and that in fact many other architectures may beimplemented which achieve the same functionality. In a conceptual sense,any arrangement of components to achieve the same functionality iseffectively “associated” such that the desired functionality may beachieved. Hence, any two components herein combined to achieve aparticular functionality may be seen as “associated with” each othersuch that the desired functionality is achieved, irrespective ofarchitectures or intermediate components. Likewise, any two componentsso associated may also be viewed as being “operably connected”, or“operably coupled”, to each other to achieve the desired functionality,and any two components capable of being so associated may also be viewedas being “operably couplable” to each other to achieve the desiredfunctionality. Specific examples of operably couplable include but arenot limited to physically mateable and/or physically interactingcomponents and/or wirelessly interactable and/or wirelessly interactingcomponents and/or logically interacting and/or logically interactablecomponents.

With respect to the use of substantially any plural and/or singularterms herein, those having skill in the art can translate from theplural to the singular and/or from the singular to the plural as isappropriate to the context and/or application. The varioussingular/plural permutations may be expressly set forth herein for sakeof clarity.

It will be understood by those within the art that, in general, termsused herein, and especially in the appended claims (e.g., bodies of theappended claims) are generally intended as “open” terms (e.g., the term“including” should be interpreted as “including but not limited to,” theterm “having” should be interpreted as “having at least,” the term“includes” should be interpreted as “includes but is not limited to,”etc.). It will be further understood by those within the art that if aspecific number of an introduced claim recitation is intended, such anintent will be explicitly recited in the claim, and in the absence ofsuch recitation no such intent is present. For example, where only oneitem is intended, the term “single” or similar language may be used. Asan aid to understanding, the following appended claims and/or thedescriptions herein may contain usage of the introductory phrases “atleast one” and “one or more” to introduce claim recitations. However,the use of such phrases should not be construed to imply that theintroduction of a claim recitation by the indefinite articles “a” or“an” limits any particular claim containing such introduced claimrecitation to embodiments containing only one such recitation, even whenthe same claim includes the introductory phrases “one or more” or “atleast one” and indefinite articles such as “a” or “an” (e.g., “a” and/or“an” should be interpreted to mean “at least one” or “one or more”). Thesame holds true for the use of definite articles used to introduce claimrecitations. In addition, even if a specific number of an introducedclaim recitation is explicitly recited, those skilled in the art willrecognize that such recitation should be interpreted to mean at leastthe recited number (e.g., the bare recitation of “two recitations,”without other modifiers, means at least two recitations, or two or morerecitations). Furthermore, in those instances where a conventionanalogous to “at least one of A, B, and C, etc.” is used, in generalsuch a construction is intended in the sense one having skill in the artwould understand the convention (e.g., “a system having at least one ofA, B, and C” would include but not be limited to systems that have Aalone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and Ctogether, and/or A, B, and C together, etc.). In those instances where aconvention analogous to “at least one of A, B, or C, etc.” is used, ingeneral such a construction is intended in the sense one having skill inthe art would understand the convention (e.g., “a system having at leastone of A, B, or C” would include but not be limited to systems that haveA alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and Ctogether, and/or A, B, and C together, etc.). It will be furtherunderstood by those within the art that virtually any disjunctive wordand/or phrase presenting two or more alternative terms, whether in thedescription, claims, or drawings, should be understood to contemplatethe possibilities of including one of the terms, either of the terms, orboth terms. For example, the phrase “A or B” will be understood toinclude the possibilities of “A” or “B” or “A and B.” Further, the terms“any of” followed by a listing of a plurality of items and/or aplurality of categories of items, as used herein, are intended toinclude “any of,” “any combination of,” “any multiple of,” and/or “anycombination of multiples of” the items and/or the categories of items,individually or in conjunction with other items and/or other categoriesof items. Moreover, as used herein, the term “set” or “group” isintended to include any number of items, including zero. Additionally,as used herein, the term “number” is intended to include any number,including zero.

In addition, where features or aspects of the disclosure are describedin terms of Markush groups, those skilled in the art will recognize thatthe disclosure is also thereby described in terms of any individualmember or subgroup of members of the Markush group.

As will be understood by one skilled in the art, for any and allpurposes, such as in terms of providing a written description, allranges disclosed herein also encompass any and all possible subrangesand combinations of subranges thereof. Any listed range can be easilyrecognized as sufficiently describing and enabling the same range beingbroken down into at least equal halves, thirds, quarters, fifths,tenths, etc. As a non-limiting example, each range discussed herein maybe readily broken down into a lower third, middle third and upper third,etc. As will also be understood by one skilled in the art all languagesuch as “up to,” “at least,” “greater than,” “less than,” and the likeincludes the number recited and refers to ranges which can besubsequently broken down into subranges as discussed above. Finally, aswill be understood by one skilled in the art, a range includes eachindividual member. Thus, for example, a group having 1-3 cells refers togroups having 1, 2, or 3 cells. Similarly, a group having 1-5 cellsrefers to groups having 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 cells, and so forth.

Moreover, the claims should not be read as limited to the provided orderor elements unless stated to that effect. In addition, use of the terms“means for” in any claim is intended to invoke 35 U.S.C. § 112, ¶6 ormeans-plus-function claim format, and any claim without the terms “meansfor” is not so intended.

A processor in association with software may be used to implement aradio frequency transceiver for use in a wireless transmit receive unit(WTRU), user equipment (UE), terminal, base station, Mobility ManagementEntity (MME) or Evolved Packet Core (EPC), or any host computer. TheWTRU may be used in conjunction with modules, implemented in hardwareand/or software including a Software Defined Radio (SDR), and othercomponents such as a camera, a video camera module, a videophone, aspeakerphone, a vibration device, a speaker, a microphone, a televisiontransceiver, a hands free headset, a keyboard, a Bluetooth® module, afrequency modulated (FM) radio unit, a Near Field Communication (NFC)Module, a liquid crystal display (LCD) display unit, an organiclight-emitting diode (OLED) display unit, a digital music player, amedia player, a video game player module, an Internet browser, and/orany Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) or Ultra Wide Band (UWB) module.

Although the invention has been described in terms of communicationsystems, it is contemplated that the systems may be implemented insoftware on microprocessors/general purpose computers (not shown). Incertain embodiments, one or more of the functions of the variouscomponents may be implemented in software that controls ageneral-purpose computer.

In addition, although the invention is illustrated and described hereinwith reference to specific embodiments, the invention is not intended tobe limited to the details shown. Rather, various modifications may bemade in the details within the scope and range of equivalents of theclaims and without departing from the invention.

1-136. (canceled)
 137. A method implemented by a WirelessTransmit/Receive Unit (WTRU), the method comprising: receiving firstinformation indicating a pattern of one or more timeslots, wherein eachtimeslot of the one or more timeslots is associated with one of aplurality of timeslot types, and wherein the plurality of timeslot typesare configured to be used for any one or more of a first communicationdirection or a second communication direction; receiving secondinformation indicating that at least one of the one or more timeslots isassociated with a Synchronization Signal (SS) transmission or PhysicalBroadcast Channel (PBCH) transmission in the first communicationdirection; determining whether a scheduled transmission in the secondcommunication direction would overlap with any symbol of the SStransmission or any symbol of the PBCH transmission in the firstcommunication direction; and on condition that the scheduledtransmission would not overlap with any symbol of the SS transmission orany symbol of the PBCH transmission in the first communicationdirection, transmitting the scheduled transmission in the secondcommunication direction in at least one timeslot from among the one ormore timeslots.
 138. The method of claim 137, wherein the transmittingof the scheduled transmission in the second communication directioncomprises at least one of: selectively timeslot muting transmissionsassociated with time-frequency (TF) resources of the secondcommunication direction, the time-frequency resources corresponding tothe at least one of the timeslots associated with the SS transmission orthe PBCH transmission in the first communication direction; orselectively muting a portion of the scheduled transmission in the secondcommunication direction.
 139. The method of claim 138, wherein theselective timeslot muting of the transmissions associated with TFresources of the second communication direction includes dropping orshifting a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) transmission or aPhysical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) transmission to be carried bythe TF resources of the muted timeslot.
 140. The method of claim 137,wherein the at least one pattern indicates one or more timeslotsassociated with a first timeslot type for communication in the firstcommunication direction, one or more timeslots associated with a secondtimeslot type for communication in the second communication direction,and one or more timeslots associated with a third timeslot type forcommunication in any of: the first communication direction or the secondcommunication direction.
 141. The method of claim 140, wherein thepattern indicates a sequence of a first set of downlink timeslots of thefirst timeslot type for communication in the first communicationdirection, followed by a second set of uplink/downlink timeslots of thethird timeslot type for communication in either the first direction orthe second direction, followed by a third set of uplink timeslots of thesecond timeslot type for communication in the second direction.
 142. Themethod of claim 137, further comprising: receiving, by the WTRU inDownlink Control Information, third information indicating an uplinkgrant; and determining, by the WTRU, whether to transmit a PhysicalUplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) transmission or a Physical Uplink ControlChannel (PUCCH) transmission in the second communication direction in atimeslot, based on at least the third information and a timeslot type ofthe timeslot.
 143. The method of claim 137, further comprising:determining, by the WTRU, whether to transmit a Physical Uplink SharedChannel (PUSCH) transmission or a Physical Uplink Control Channel(PUCCH) transmission in the second communication direction in atimeslot, based on at least a grant and whether a collision is expectedto occur in the timeslot between: (1) any of the PUSCH transmission orthe PUCCH transmission in the second communication direction, and (2)the SS transmission or PBCH transmission in the first communicationdirection.
 144. The method of claim 137, further comprising: receiving,by the WTRU in Downlink Control Information, third informationindicating an uplink grant; and determining, by the WTRU, whether totransmit a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) transmission or aPhysical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) transmission in the secondcommunication direction in a timeslot, based on at least the thirdinformation, a timeslot type of the timeslot and whether a collision isexpected to occur in the timeslot between: (1) any of the PUSCHtransmission or the PUCCH transmission in the second communicationdirection, and (2) the SS transmission or PBCH transmission in the firstcommunication direction.
 145. The method of claim 137, wherein: thefirst information is received via Radio Resource Control signaling orphysical layer signaling, and the SS transmission is any of a primary SStransmission or a secondary SS transmission.
 146. The method of claim137, wherein the first communication direction is a downlinkcommunication direction to the WTRU and the second communicationdirection is an uplink communication direction from the WTRU.
 147. AWireless Transmit/Receive Unit (WTRU), comprising: a transmit/receiveunit configured to: receive first information indicating a pattern ofone or more timeslots, wherein each timeslot of the one or moretimeslots is associated with one of a plurality of timeslot types, andwherein the plurality of timeslot types are configured to be used forany one or more of a first communication direction or a secondcommunication direction, and receive second information indicating thatat least one of the one or more timeslots is associated with aSynchronization Signal (SS) transmission or Physical Broadcast Channel(PBCH) transmission in the first communication direction; and aprocessor configured to: determine whether a scheduled transmission inthe second communication direction would overlap with any symbol of theSS transmission or any symbol of the PBCH transmission in the firstcommunication direction, and on condition that the scheduledtransmission would not overlap with any symbol of the SS transmission orany symbol of the PBCH transmission in the first communicationdirection, transmit the scheduled transmission in the secondcommunication direction in at least one timeslot from among the one ormore timeslots.
 148. The WTRU of claim 147, wherein the processor isconfigured to at least one of: selectively timeslot mute transmissionsassociated with time-frequency (TF) resources of the secondcommunication direction, the time-frequency resources corresponding tothe at least one of the timeslots associated with the SS transmission orthe PBCH transmission in the first communication direction; orselectively mute a portion of the scheduled transmission in the secondcommunication direction.
 149. The WTRU of claim 148, wherein theprocessor is configured to drop or shift a Physical Uplink SharedChannel (PUSCH) transmission or a Physical Uplink Control Channel(PUCCH) transmission to be carried by the TF resources of the mutedtimeslot.
 150. The WTRU of claim 147, wherein the pattern indicates oneor more timeslots that are associated with a first timeslot type forcommunication in the first communication direction, one or moretimeslots that are associated with a second timeslot type forcommunication in the second communication direction, and one or moretimeslots associated with a third timeslot type for communication in anyof: the first communication direction or the second communicationdirection.
 151. The WTRU of claim 150, wherein the pattern indicates asequence of a first set of downlink timeslots of the first timeslot typefor communication in the first communication direction, followed by asecond set of uplink/downlink timeslots of the third timeslot type forcommunication in either the first direction or the second direction,followed by a third set of uplink timeslots of the second timeslot typefor communication in the second direction.
 152. The WTRU of claim 147,wherein: the transmit/receive unit is configured to receive in DownlinkControl Information, third information indicating an uplink grant; andthe processor is configured to determine whether to transmit a PhysicalUplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) transmission in the second communicationdirection in a timeslot, based on at least the third information and thetimeslot type of the timeslot.
 153. The WTRU of claim 147, wherein theprocessor is configured to determine whether to transmit a PhysicalUplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) transmission or a Physical Uplink ControlChannel (PUCCH) transmission in the second communication direction in atimeslot, based on at least a grant and whether a collision is expectedto occur in the timeslot between: (1) any of the PUSCH transmission orthe PUCCH transmission in the second communication direction, and (2)the SS transmission or PBCH transmission in the first communicationdirection.
 154. The WTRU of claim 147, wherein: the transmit/receiveunit is configured to receive in Downlink Control Information, thirdinformation indicating an uplink grant; and the processor is configuredto determine whether to transmit a Physical Uplink Shared Channel(PUSCH) transmission in the second communication direction in atimeslot, based on at least the third information, a timeslot type ofthe timeslot and whether a collision is expected to occur in thetimeslot between: (1) any of the PUSCH transmission or the PUCCHtransmission in the second communication direction, and (2) the SStransmission or PBCH transmission in the first communication direction.155. The WTRU of claim 147, wherein: the first information is receivedvia Radio Resource Control signaling or physical layer signaling, andthe SS transmission is any of a primary SS transmission or a secondarySS transmission.
 156. The WTRU of claim 147, wherein the firstcommunication direction is a downlink communication direction to theWTRU and the second communication direction is an uplink communicationdirection from the WTRU.
 157. The method of claim 137, comprising: oncondition that the scheduled transmission would overlap with any symbolof the SS transmission or the PBCH transmission in the firstcommunication direction, prior to the transmitting, muting at least aportion of the scheduled transmission in the second communicationdirection.
 158. The WTRU of claim 147, wherein: on condition that thescheduled transmission would overlap with any symbol of the SStransmission or the PBCH transmission in the first communicationdirection, the processor is configured to: prior to the transmitting,mute at least a portion of the scheduled transmission in the secondcommunication direction.
 159. A method implemented by a WirelessTransmit/Receive Unit (WTRU), the method comprising: receiving firstinformation indicating a pattern of one or more timeslots, wherein eachtimeslot of the one or more timeslots is one of a plurality of timeslottypes, and wherein the plurality of timeslot types are configured to beused for any of a first communication direction and a secondcommunication direction; receiving second information indicating that atleast one of the one or more timeslots is associated with aSynchronization Signal (SS) transmission or Physical Broadcast Channel(PBCH) transmission in the first communication direction; determiningwhether a scheduled transmission in the second communication directionwould overlap with any symbol of the SS transmission or any symbol ofthe PBCH transmission in the first communication direction; and oncondition that the scheduled transmission would overlap with any symbolof the SS transmission or any symbol of the PBCH transmission in thefirst communication direction, not transmitting the scheduledtransmission in the second communication direction in at least onetimeslot from among the one or more timeslots.
 160. A WirelessTransmit/Receive Unit (WTRU), comprising: a transmit/receive unitconfigured to: receive first information indicating a pattern of one ormore timeslots, wherein each timeslot of the one or more timeslots isone of a plurality of timeslot types, and wherein the plurality oftimeslot types are configured to be used for any of a firstcommunication direction and a second communication direction; receivesecond information indicating that at least one of the one or moretimeslots is associated with a Synchronization Signal (SS) transmissionor Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) transmission in the firstcommunication direction; and a processor configured to: determinewhether a scheduled transmission in the second communication directionwould overlap with any symbol of the SS transmission or any symbol ofthe PBCH transmission in the first communication direction; and oncondition that the scheduled transmission would overlap with any symbolof the SS transmission or any symbol of the PBCH transmission in thefirst communication direction, not transmit the scheduled transmissionin the second communication direction in at least one timeslot fromamong the one or more timeslots.
 161. The method of claim 137, whereinone of the plurality of timeslot types comprises a flexible timeslottype configured for simultaneous transmission in an uplink direction andreception in a downlink direction.
 162. The WTRU of claim 147, whereinone of the plurality of timeslot types comprises a flexible timeslottype configured for simultaneous transmission in an uplink direction andreception in a downlink direction.